Hp Pcl5 Users Manual
PCL5 to the manual 1a2c39fb-53a3-476a-9662-b4e0dc493ed7
2015-02-09
: Hp Hp-Pcl5-Users-Manual-549283 hp-pcl5-users-manual-549283 hp pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 252 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
PCL 5 Comparison Guide
for the
HP LaserJet III
HP LaserJet IIID
HP LaserJet IIISi
HP LaserJet IIIP
HP LaserJet 4 Family
HP LaserJet 4000 series
HP Color LaserJet
HP Color LaserJet 5/5M
HP LaserJet 5 Family
HP LaserJet 6 Family
HP DeskJet 1200C
HP DeskJet 1600C
Printers
Edition 1
E1097
HP Part No. 5021-0378
Printed in U.S.A. 10/97
All Rights Reserved. This document contains proprietary
information which is protected by copyright. No part of this
document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated to
another language without the prior written consent of
Hewlett-Packard Company.
Warranty The information contained in this document is subject to
change without notice.
Hewlett-Packard makes no warranty of any kind with
regard to this material, including, but not limited to, the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose.
Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable for errors contained
herein or for incidental consequential damages in
connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this
material.
© Copyright 1997 Hewlett-Packard Company
ii
Printing
Information This manual was created using text formatting software on
a personal computer. The camera-ready copy was printed
direct to film and reproduced using standard offset printing.
Trademark Credits Intellifont is a U.S. registered trademark of Agfa Division,
Miles Incorporated. CG Times is a product of Agfa
Corporation, AGFA Compugraphic Division. LaserJet, PCL,
DeskJet, Vectra, and Resolution Enhancement are U.S.
registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company. IBM
is a registered trademark of International Business
Machines Corporation. Wingdings, MS-Mincho, and
MS-Gothic are trademarks, and Microsoft, Windows, and
MS-DOS are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation. Centronics is a U.S. registered trademark of
Centronics Corporation. ITC Zapf Dingbats is a U.S.
registered trademark of International Typeface Corpora-
tion. Helvetica and Times Roman are trademarks of
Linotype AG and its subsidiaries.
Univers is a U.S. registered trademark of Linotype AG and
its subsidiaries. PostScript and the PostScript logo are
registered trademarks of Adobe Systems, Inc. in the U.S.
and other countries. Arial, Times New Roman and
Monotype are U.S. registered trademarks of Monotype
Corporation plc. Macintosh is a registered trademark and
TrueType is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. ESC/P is
a trademark of Seiko-Epson Corporation.
iii
Conventions This manual uses the following conventions:
Bold indicates a term defined in the glossary.
Italic refers to a related document, or is used for
emphasis.
The cursive letter l is used in some examples to
distinguish the letter “l” from the numeral “1” (one).
A slash zero 0 is used in some examples and escape
sequences to distinguish the letter “O” from the number
“0”.
0x XX represents a hexadecimal number (XX).
The ~ character indicates that the current line of code is
a continuation of the previous line.
Note Notes contain important information set off from the text.
iv
Contents
1 Printer Features
PCL Feature Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
PCL 5 Technical Reference Manual Corrections . . . . . . . 1-5
PCL Feature Support Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Printable Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
2 Printer-Specific Differences
HP LaserJet III and IIID Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
HP LaserJet IIISi Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
HP LaserJet IIIP Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Raster Graphics Adaptive Compression (IIIP) . . . . . . . 2-4
HP LaserJet 4 Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Configuration Command (AppleTalk) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
HP LaserJet 4Si Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
HP LaserJet 4L Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
HP LaserJet 4ML Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Logical Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Logical Operations and Transparency Interactions . . . . 2-15
Logical Operation Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Pixel Placement Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Pixel Placement Command (HP-GL/2) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Merge Control Command (HP-GL/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
HP LaserJet 4P and 4MP Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
HP LaserJet 4PJ Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Text Parsing Method Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Character Text Path Direction Command . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Font Header Format 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
New Font Format Header Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Description of Font Header Segments . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
HP LaserJet 4PJ Programming Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
HP LaserJet 4 Plus and 4M Plus Printers . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
HP LaserJet 4V and 4MV Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Font Header Format 16 Bitmap Font Support . . . . . . . . 2-63
Font Header Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Character Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
HP Color LaserJet Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
AppleTalk Configuration Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
HP LaserJet 4LJ Pro Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
HP LaserJet 4LC Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
HP LaserJet 5P and 5MP Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
HP LaserJet 5L Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
HP LaserJet 5Si and 5SiMx Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Paper (Media) Source Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
Output Bin Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Alphanumeric ID Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
HP DeskJet 1200C Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
Updated Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
Enter HP-GL/2 Mode Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
Media Type Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
Print Quality Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89
Negative Motion Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
HP DeskJet 1600C Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
HP LaserJet 5 and 5M Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
Text Parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
Two-Byte HP-GL/2 Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
Label Mode Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
Contents-2
Vertical Writing with Proportional Fonts . . . . . . . . . 2-101
HP Color LaserJet 5 and 5M Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
HP LaserJet 6P/ 6MP Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105
HP LaserJet 5Si Mopier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105
HP LaserJet 6L Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
HP LaserJet 4000 series Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
3 Internal Typefaces/Fonts and Symbol Sets
Bitmap Fonts and Symbol Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Scalable Typefaces and Symbol Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Typeface Selection Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
4 Print Environment
5 Memory Usage
Operation of ADC and MEt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Image Adapt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Additional MEt Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
ADC and MEt Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Recommendations For Sending Data to the Printer . . . . 5-4
Raster Graphics Adaptive Compression (Method 5) . . . . . 5-7
A Printer Commands
B Internal Symbol Set Charts
ISO Substitution Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-21
Conversion Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22
C Symbol Set and Typeface Codes
D MSL/Unicode Symbol Indexes
Index
Contents-3
Contents-4
1
Printer Features
Introduction Hewlett-Packard printers which support the PCL 5 printer
language contain slightly different feature sets, each
suitable for that printer’s intended use. Each printer
implements minor variations of PCL 5 as a result of those
differences. With new printer releases, new features may be
added with new commands and/or PCL operations which
require documentation.
The purpose of this guide is to identify the differences in
the implementation of the PCL 5 Printer Language for
different HP LaserJet and DeskJet printers, as compared to
that described in the PCL 5 Printer Language Technical
Reference Manual. This guide describes new commands and
exceptions to existing commands unique to the printers, as
well as internal typeface/font support and print
environment settings.
Feature Set 1-1
This guide covers the following HP LaserJet printers:
Introduction Date
LaserJet III March 1990
LaserJet IIID September 1990
LaserJet IIISi February 1991
LaserJet IIIP May 1991
LaserJet 4, 4M October 1992
LaserJet 4Si, 4SiMx April 1993
LaserJet 4L, 4ML May 1993
LaserJet 4P, 4MP September 1993
LaserJet 4 Plus, 4M Plus May 1994
LaserJet 4PJ May 1994
LaserJet 4V, 4MV September 1994
DeskJet 1200C May 1993
DeskJet 1200/PS May 1993
Color LaserJet September 1994
LaserJet 4LC March 1995
DeskJet 1600C March 1995
LaserJet 4LJ Pro May 1995
LaserJet 5P, 5MP May 1995
LaserJet 5L September 1995
LaserJet 5Si, 5SiMx November 1995
Color LaserJet 5, 5M March 1996
LaserJet 5, 5M April 1996
LaserJet 5Si Mopier October 1996
LaserJet 6P, 6MP October 1996
LaserJet 6L September 1997
LaserJet 4000 series November 1997
This guide also covers the HP 1200C and 1600C DeskJet
printers.
1-2 Feature Set
PCL Feature
Support Table 1-1, the PCL Feature Support Matrix, lists all the
printer commands from the PCL 5 Printer Language
Technical Reference Manual and identifies which of these
commands are supported by the various printers. More
detailed PCL information for each PCL 5 printer is
provided in Chapter 2.
Note The PCL 5 Printer Language Technical Reference Manual
(part number 5961-0509) was revised for the release of the
HP LaserJet 4 printer and contains all PCL language
features up to the HP LaserJet 4 printer.
With the introduction of the HP LaserJet 4 printer,
Hewlett-Packard enhanced the PCL 5 printer language to
provide some new features. The major improvements to the
PCL 5 printer language are listed below.
600 dpi support for higher quality printing
45 scalable typefaces for greater type variety
TrueType rasterizer (in addition to the Intellifont
rasterizer) for fast Windows printing, and for matching
Windows and printer type (easy WYSIWYG)
New graphics commands for faster and better curves and
shading quality
Bi-directional I/O for easier use and sharing by providing
printer status to computer applications
Automatic and faster printer language switching
Automatic I/O switching for faster I/O rates
Improved memory management so most pages print in
standard memory
Improved PCL and HP-GL/2 performance for faster
graphics and text printing
Feature Set 1-3
Notes In Table 1-1, if the command value field parameters are
not listed, then all parameters are supported by printers
that support that command.
The value in parentheses following a command
parameter identifies the parameter value field value (for
example, the parameter “Letter (2)” indicates that the
value field to select letter size in the Page Size command
is “2” ).
Commands which are not supported (“ns”) by a printer
are ignored.
1-4 Feature Set
PCL 5 Technical
Reference Manual
Corrections
This section describes updates to the PCL 5 Printer
Language Technical Reference Manual (5961-0509).
Because this manual will not be updated, any changes to it
are documented in this guide. Some errors have been
identified in the PCL 5 Printer Language Technical
Reference Manual since its printing. Those errors are
identified and corrections are provided on this page.
Chapter 4
PCL Job Control
Commands
Unit of Measure Command
In Figure 4-6 on page 4-18, the two escape sequences at the
top should read “(?&u100D) and (?&u200D)” instead of
“(?&u100B) and (?&u200B).”
Chapter 8
PCL Font Selection Transparent Print Data Command
The last sentence in the note at the bottom of page 8-33
should read “Refer to the PCL 5 Comparison Guide,
Appendix A, for character codes for the various symbol
sets.” instead of “Refer to Appendix A for character codes for
the various symbol sets.”
Chapter 13
The PCL Print Model User-Defined Pattern Command
In Figure 13-10 on page 13-19, byte zero should read
Format (20) instead of Format (0)
On page 13-21, Format (Byte 0) should read “0” for a 300
DPI user-defined pattern header and “20” for a
resolution-specified user-defined pattern header.
Feature Set 1-5
FUNCTION COMMAND III IIID IIISi IIIP 4
4M 4Si
4SiMx 4L 4ML
4P
4MP 4PJ 4 Plus
4M Plus 4V
4MV
MISCELLANEOUS
Configuration (AppleTalk) ?&b#W[data] ns ns ns ns ✓✓
ns ✓ns ✓✓
JOB CONTROL
Universal Exit/Start of PJL
(UEL) ?%–12345X ns ns ✓ns ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Reset ?E ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Number of Copies ?&l#X ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Simplex/Duplex Print ?&l#S ns ✓✓
ns ns ✓ns ns ns ✓1ns
Left (Long-Edge) Offset
Registration ?&l#U ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Top (Short-Edge) Offset
Registration ?&l#Z ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Unit Of Measure ?&u#D ns ns ns ns ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Mechanical Print Quality ?*o#Q ns ns nsnsns ns nsnsns ns ns
Media Type ?&l#M ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Negative Motion ?&a#N ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
✓
- Indicates a command is supported. ns- Indicates a command is not supported.
1
Supported if duplex option is installed.
Table 1-1. PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix
1-6 Feature Set
FUNCTION COMMAND Color
LJ
Color
LJ 5,
5M 4LJ
Pro 4LC 5L
6L 5P
5MP 6P
6MP
5Si
5SiMx
Mopier 5
5M 4000
series
Desk-
Jet
1200C
Desk-
Jet
1600C
MISCELLANEOUS
Configuration (AppleTalk) ?&b#W[data] ✓✓✓
ns ns ✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓
JOB CONTROL
Universal Exit/Start of
PJL (UEL) ?%–12345X ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓
Reset ?E ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓
Number of Copies ?&l#X ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓
Simplex/Duplex Print ?&l#S ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓✓
ns ns
Left (Long-Edge) Offset
Registration ?&l#U ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓
Top (Short-Edge) Offset
Registration ?&l#Z ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓
Unit Of Measure ?&u#D ns ns ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ns ✓
Mechanical Print Quality ?*o#Q nsnsnsnsnsnsns ns nsns ✓✓
Media Type ?&l#M ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓
Negative Motion ?&a#N ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓
✓
- Indicates a command is supported. ns- Indicates a command is not supported.
Table 1-1. PCL Feature Support Matrix (continued)
Feature Set 1-7
FUNCTION COMMAND III IIID IIISi IIIP 4
4M 4Si
4SiMx 4L 4ML
4P
4MP 4PJ 4 Plus
4M Plus 4V
4MV
PAGE CONTROL
Page (Job) Size ?&l#A
Executive (1) ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Letter (2) ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Legal (3) ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Ledger (6) ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓
A5 (25) ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
A4 (26) ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
A3 (27) ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓
JIS B5 Paper (45) ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓ns ✓
JIS B4 Paper (46) ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓
Monarch Envelope (80) ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Comm. 10 Envelope (81) ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Intl. DL Envelope (90) ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Intl. C5 Envelope (91) ✓✓
ns ✓✓ns ✓✓✓✓✓
Intl. B5 Envelope (100) ns ns ns ns ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓
Custom (101) ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓ ns ✓2
Hagaki Postcard (71) ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓ns ✓
Oufuku-Hagaki
Postcard (72) ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓ns ✓
Orientation ?&l#O ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Page Side Selection1?&a#G ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Job Separation ?&l1T ns ns ✓ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
✓
- Indicates a command is supported. ns - Indicates a command is not supported.
1
On non-duplex printers, this command causes a conditional page eject.
2
The custom size is 11.7" x 17.7" on the HP LaserJet 4V/4MV printers.
Table 1-1. PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)
1-8 Feature Set
FUNCTION COMMAND Color
LJ
Color
LJ 5,
5M 4LJ
Pro 4LC 5L
6L 5P
5MP 6P
6MP
5Si
5SiMx
Mopier 5
5M 4000
series
Desk-
Jet
1200C
Desk-
Jet
1600C
PAGE CONTROL
Page (Job) Size ?&l#A
Executive (1) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ns ns
Letter (2) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Legal (3) ✓✓1✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Ledger (6) ✓4✓1ns ns ns ns ns ✓ns ns ns ns
A5 (25) ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓ns ✓✓ns ns
A4 (26) ✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
A3 (27) ✓✓1ns ns ns ns ns ✓ns ns ns ns
JIS B5 Paper (45) ns ns ✓✓
ns ns ✓✓✓✓
ns ns
JIS B4 Paper (46) ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓✓
ns ns ns
Monarch Envelope (80) ns ns ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ns ns
Com-10 Envelope (81) ns ns ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Intl. DL Envelope (90) ns ns ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Intl. C5 Envelope (91) ns ns ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Intl. B5 Envelope (100) ns ns ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ns ns
Custom (101) ns ns ✓✓
ns2✓✓ ✓
3✓✓
5ns ns
Hagaki Postcard (71) ns ns ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Oufuku-Hagaki
Postcard (72) ns ns ✓✓
ns ns ✓ns ✓ns ns ns
Orientation ?&l#O ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Page Side Selection4?&a#G ns ns ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Job Separation ?&l1T ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
✓
- Indicates a command is supported. ns - Indicates a command is not supported.
1
Black & White only
2
For the HP LaserJet 5L printer, the printer driver sets the paper size to legal (3) when “custom” is selected.
3
The custom size is 11.7" x 17.7" on HP LaserJet 5Si, 5SiMx, and 5Si Mopier printers.
4
On non-duplex printers, this command causes a conditional page eject.
5
For the LaserJet 4000 series printers, the custom size is configurable via the control panel or PML.
Table 1-1. PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)
Feature Set 1-9
FUNCTION COMMAND III IIID IIISi IIIP 4
4M 4Si
4SiMx 4L 4ML
4P
4MP 4PJ 4 Plus
4M Plus 4V
4MV
PAGE CONTROL (continued)
Paper (Media) Source ?&l#H
Eject Page (0) ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Main (Front) Paper
Source (1)
✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Manual (Top/Rear)
Feed (2)
✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Manual Env. Feed (3) ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Alt. Paper Source (4) ns ✓✓✓✓✓
ns ns ns ✓✓
Opt. Large Source (5) ns ns ns ns ✓✓
ns ns ns ✓✓
Envelope Feeder (6) ns ✓✓ns ✓✓
ns ns ns ✓ns
Auto Select (7) ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Tray 1 (right side) (8) ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
HCI Trays 2-21 (20-39) ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Output (Media) Bin ?&l#G
Automatic (0) ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Destination Tray 1 (1) ns ns ✓ns ns ✓ns ns ns ns ns
Destination Tray 2 (2) ns ns ✓ns ns ✓ns ns ns ns ns
Destination Tray 3 (3) ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Print Direction ?&a#P ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Character Text Path Dir. ?&c#T ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓ns ✓
Left Margin ?&a#L ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Right Margin ?&a#M ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Clear Horizontal Margins ?9✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Top Margin ?&l#E ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Text Length ?&l#F ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Perforation Skip ?&l#L ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Horizontal Motion Index ?&k#H ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Vertical Motion Index ?&l#C ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Line Spacing ?&l#D ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
ALPHANUMERIC ID (Media selection by type/PCL mass storage command)
Alphanumeric ID ?&n#W[oper-
ation] [string] ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
✓
- Indicates a command is supported. ns - Indicates a command is not supported.
Table 1-1. PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)
1-10 Feature Set
FUNCTION COMMAND Color
LJ
Color
LJ 5,
5M 4LJ
Pro 4LC 5L
6L 5P
5MP 6P
6MP
5Si
5SiMx
Mopier 5
5M 4000
series
Desk-
Jet
1200C
Desk-
Jet
1600C
PAGE CONTROL (continued)
Paper (Media) Source ?&l#H
Eject Page (0) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Main (Front) Paper
Source (1)
✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Manual (Top/Rear)
Feed (2)
✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Manual Env. Feed (3) ns ns ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ns ns
Alt. Paper Source (4) ✓✓
ns ns ns ✓✓✓✓✓ns ns
Optional Source (5) ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓✓ ✓ns
Envelope Feeder (6) ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓✓ns ns
Auto Select (7) ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓✓ns ✓
Tray 1 (right side) (8) ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓ns ns ns ns
HCI Trays 2-21 (20-39) ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓ns ✓1ns ns
Output (Media) Bin ?&l#G
Automatic (0) ns ✓ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Destination Tray 1 (1) ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓✓ns ns
Destination Tray 2 ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓✓ns ns
Destination Tray 3 ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓ns ns ns ns
Print Direction ?&a#P ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Character Text Path Dir. ?&c#T ns ns ✓✓
ns ✓✓✓✓✓ns ns
Left Margin ?&a#L ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Right Margin ?&a#M ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Clear Horizontal Margins ?9✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Top Margin ?&l#E ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Text Length ?&l#F ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Perforation Skip ?&l#L ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Horizontal Motion Index ?&k#H ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Vertical Motion Index ?&l#C ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Line Spacing ?&l#D ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
ALPHANUMERIC ID (Media selection by type/PCL mass storage command)
Alphanumeric ID ?&n#W[oper-
ation] [string] ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓✓ns ns
✓
- Indicates a command is supported. ns - Indicates a command is not supported.
1
The LaserJet 4000 series printers support HCI trays 2– 41 (20 – 59)
Table 1-1. PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)
Feature Set 1-11
FUNCTION COMMAND III IIID IIISi IIIP 4
4M 4Si
4SiMx 4L 4ML
4P
4MP 4PJ 4 Plus
4M Plus 4V
4MV
CURSOR POSITIONING
Horizontal Position ?&a#C ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
?*p#X ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
?&a#H ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Vertical Position ?&a#R ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
?*p#Y ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
?&a#V ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Half Line Feed ?=✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Line Termination ?&k#G ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Push/Pop Position ?&f#S ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
FONT SELECTION
The Primary font printer commands in this table can be changed to Secondary by replacing the left parenthesis
“(” in the command with a right parenthesis “)”.
Symbol Set (Primary) ?(ID ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Spacing (Primary) ?(s#P ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Pitch (Primary) ?(s#H ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Height (Primary) ?(s#V ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Style (Primary) ?(s#S ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Stroke Weight (Primary) ?(s#B ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Typeface (Primary) ?(s#T ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Font Selection By ID # (Pri.) ?(#X ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Select Default Font (Primary) ?(3@ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Underline ?&d#D ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
?&d@ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Transparent Print Data ?&p#X[data] ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Text Parsing Method ?&t#P ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓ns ✓
FONT MANAGEMENT
Assign Font ID # ?*c#D ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Font Control ?*c#F ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
USER-DEFINED SYMBOL SET
Symbol Set ID Code ?*c#R ns ns ns ✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Define Symbol Set ?(f#W[data] ns ns ns ✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Symbol Set Control ?*c#S ns ns ns ✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
✓
- Indicates a command is supported. ns - Indicates a command is not supported.
Table 1-1. PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)
1-12 Feature Set
FUNCTION COMMAND Color
LJ
Color
LJ 5,
5M 4LJ
Pro 4LC 5L
6L 5P
5MP 6P
6MP
5Si
5SiMx
Mopier 5
5M 4000
series
Desk-
Jet
1200C
Desk-
Jet
1600C
CURSOR POSITIONING
Horizontal Position ?&a#C ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
?*p#X ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
?&a#H ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Vertical Position ?&a#R ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
?*p#Y ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
?&a#V ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓
Half Line Feed ?=✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Line Termination ?&k#G ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Push/Pop Position ?&f#S ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
FONT SELECTION
The Primary font commands in this table can be changed to Secondary by replacing the left parenthesis “(” in
the command with a right parenthesis “)”.
Symbol Set (Primary) ?(ID ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Spacing (Primary) ?(s#P ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Pitch (Primary) ?(s#H ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Height (Primary) ?(s#V ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Style (Primary) ?(s#S ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Stroke Weight (Primary) ?(s#B ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Typeface (Primary) ?(s#T ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Font Selection By ID # (Pri.) ?(#X ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Select Default Font (Primary) ?(3@ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Underline ?&d#D ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
?&d@ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Transparent Print Data ?&p#X[data] ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Text Parsing Method ?&t#P ns ns ✓✓
ns ✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
1✓
FONT MANAGEMENT
Assign Font ID # ?*c#D ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Font Control ?*c#F ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
USER-DEFINED SYMBOL SET
Symbol Set ID Code ?*c#R ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Define Symbol Set ?(f#W[data] ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Symbol Set Control ?*c#S ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
✓
- Indicates a command is supported. ns - Indicates a command is not supported.
1
Available in code versions “B” and “C” only (see the DeskJet 1200C section near the end of this chapter).
Table 1-1. PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)
Feature Set 1-13
FUNCTION COMMAND III IIID IIISi IIIP 4
4M 4Si
4SiMx 4L 4ML
4P
4MP 4PJ 4 Plus
4M Plus 4V
4MV
SOFT FONT CREATION
Font Descriptor ?)s#W[data]
Range: 0 - 32767 ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Range: 0 - 65535
Character Code ?*c#E ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Download Character ?(s#W[data] ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
MACROS
Macro ID ?&f#Y ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Macro Control ?&f#X ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
PRINT MODEL IMAGING
Source Transparency Mode ?*v#N ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Pattern Transparency Mode ?*v#O ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Area Fill (Pattern) ID ?*c#G ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Select Current Pattern ?*v#T
Solid Black (0) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Solid White (1) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
HP Shading Pattern (2) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Cross-hatch Pattern (3)
(HP-hatch Pattern)
✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
User-defined Pattern (4) ns ns ns ✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Logical Operation ?*l#O ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓✓✓
Pixel Placement ?*l#R ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓✓✓
USER-DEFINED PATTERN
Define (Download) Pattern ?*c#W[data] ns ns ns ✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Range: 0 - 32767 ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Range: 0 - 65535
Set Pattern Reference Point ?*p#R ns ns ns ✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
User-defined Pattern Control ?*c#Q ns ns ns ✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
✓
- Indicates a command is supported. ns - Indicates a command is not supported.
Table 1-1. PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)
1-14 Feature Set
FUNCTION COMMAND Color
LJ
Color
LJ 5,
5M 4LJ
Pro 4LC 5L
6L 5P
5MP 6P
6MP
5Si
5SiMx
Mopier 5
5M 4000
series
Desk-
Jet
1200C
Desk-
Jet
1600C
SOFT FONT CREATION
Font Descriptor ?)s#W[data]
Range: 0 - 32767 ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Range: 0 - 65535 ✓✓ ✓ ✓✓
Character Code ?*c#E ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Download Character ?(s#W[data] ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
MACROS
Macro ID ?&f#Y ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Macro Control ?&f#X ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
PRINT MODEL IMAGING
Source Transparency
Mode ?*v#N ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Pattern Transparency
Mode ?*v#O ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Area Fill (Pattern) ID ?*c#G ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Select Current Pattern ?*v#T
Solid Black (0) ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Solid White (1) ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
HP Shading Pattern (2) ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Cross-hatch Pattern (3)
(HP-hatch Pattern)
✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
User-defined Pattern (4) ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Logical Operation ?*l#O ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Pixel Placement ?*l#R ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
USER-DEFINED PATTERN
Define (Download) Pattern ?*c#W[data] ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Range: 0 - 32767 ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Range: 0 - 65535 ✓✓ ✓ ✓✓
Set Pattern Reference
Point ?*p#R ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
User-defined Pattern
Control ?*c#Q ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
✓
- Indicates a command is supported. ns - Indicates a command is not supported.
Table 1-1. PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)
Feature Set 1-15
FUNCTION COMMAND III IIID IIISi IIIP 4
4M 4Si
4SiMx 4L 4ML
4P
4MP 4PJ 4 Plus
4M Plus 4V
4MV
RASTER GRAPHICS
Raster Resolution ?*t#R
75 Dots/Inch (75) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
100 Dots/Inch (100) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
150 Dots/Inch (150) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
200 Dots/Inch (200) 1 ns ns ns ns ✓✓
ns ✓2✓✓✓
300 Dots/Inch (300) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
600 Dots/Inch (600) 1ns ns ns ns ✓✓
ns ✓2✓✓✓
Graphics Presentation ?*r#F ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Raster Height (Source) ?*r#T ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Raster Height (Destination) ?*t#V ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Raster Width (Source) ?*r#S ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Raster Width (Destination) ?*t#H ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Scale Algorithm ?*t#K ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Start Raster Graphics ?*r#A
At logical page left limit(0) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
At CAP (1) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
At logic. page left limit,
scaling ON (2) ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
At CAP, scaling ON (3) ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Y Offset ?*b#Y ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Set Compression Mode ?*b#M
Unencoded (0) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Run-Length Encoded (1) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
TIFF Encoded (2) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Delta Row Encoded (3) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Mode 5 Adaptive (5) ns ns ns ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓
Replacement Delta Row (9) ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Transfer Raster (Row/Block) ?*b#W[data] ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Transfer Raster (Plane) ?*b#V[data] ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
End Graphics
Version B ? *rB ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Version C (Preferred) ?*rC ns ns ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
✓
- Indicates a command is supported. ns - Indicates a command is not supported.
1
Supported if printer resolution is 600 dpi.
2
The 4ML printer does not support 200 or 600 dpi operation.
Table 1-1. PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)
1-16 Feature Set
FUNCTION COMMAND Color
LJ
Color
LJ 5,
5M 4LJ
Pro 4LC 5L
6L 5P
5MP 6P
6MP
5Si
5SiMx
Mopier 5
5M 4000
series
Desk-
Jet
1200C
Desk-
Jet
1600C
RASTER GRAPHICS
Raster Resolution ?*t#R
75 Dots/Inch (75) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
100 Dots/Inch (100) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
150 Dots/Inch (150) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
200 Dots/Inch (200) 1 ns ns ✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ns ✓
300 Dots/Inch (300) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
600 Dots/Inch (600) 1ns ns ✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ns ✓
Graphics Presentation ?*r#F ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Raster Height (Source) ?*r#T ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Raster Height (Destination) ?*t#V ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓
Raster Width (Source) ?*r#S ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Raster Width (Destination) ?*t#H ✓ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓
Scale Algorithm ?*t#K ns ✓ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓
Start Raster Graphics ?*r#A
At logical page left limit(0) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
At CAP (1) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
At logic. page left limit,
scaling ON (2)
✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓
At CAP, scaling ON (3) ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓
Y Offset ?*b#Y ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Set Compression Mode ?*b#M
Unencoded (0) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Run-Length Encoded (1) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
TIFF Encoded (2) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Delta Row Encoded (3) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Mode 5 Adaptive (5) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Replacement Delta Row (9) ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓
Transfer Raster (Row/Block) ?*b#W[data] ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Transfer Raster (Plane) ?*b#V[data] ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓
End Graphics
Version B ? *rB ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Version C (Preferred) ?*rC ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓
✓
- Indicates a command is supported. ns - Indicates a command is not supported.
1
Supported if printer resolution is 600 dpi.
Table 1-1. PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)
Feature Set 1-17
FUNCTION COMMAND III IIID IIISi IIIP 4
4M 4Si
4SiMx 4L 4ML
4P
4MP 4PJ 4 Plus
4M Plus 4V
4MV
RECTANGULAR AREA FILL
Horizontal Rectangle Size ?*c#A ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
?*c#H ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓✓
Vertical Rectangle Size ?*c#B ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓✓
?*c#V ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓✓
Pattern ID (Area Fill ID) ?*c#G
1-100 for Shading ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓✓
1-6 for Cross-hatch ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓✓
0-32767 for User-defined ns ns ns ✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓✓
Fill Rectangle Area ?*c#P
Black (solid) (0) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓✓
(Solid) White (erase) (1) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓✓
Shaded (gray) (2) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓✓
Cross-hatch Pattern (3) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓✓
User-defined Pattern (4) ns ns ns ✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓✓
Current Pattern (5) ✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓✓
STATUS READBACK
Set Status Readback
Location Type ?*s#T nsnsnsns✓✓✓✓✓ ✓✓
Set Status Readback
Location Unit ?*s#U nsnsnsns✓✓✓✓✓ ✓✓
Inquire Status Readback
Entity ?*s#I ns ns ns ns ✓✓✓✓✓ ✓✓
Free Space ?*s1M nsnsnsns✓✓✓✓✓ ✓✓
Flush All Pages ?&r#F ns ns ns ns ✓✓✓✓✓ ✓✓
Echo ?*s#X nsnsnsns✓✓✓✓✓ ✓✓
✓
- Indicates a command is supported. ns - Indicates a command is not supported.
Table 1-1. PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)
1-18 Feature Set
FUNCTION COMMAND Color
LJ
Color
LJ 5,
5M 4LJ
Pro 4LC 5L
6L 5P
5MP 6P
6MP
5Si
5SiMx
Mopier 5
5M 4000
series
Desk-
Jet
1200C
Desk-
Jet
1600C
RECTANGULAR AREA FILL
Horizontal Rectangle Size ?*c#A ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓
?*c#H ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓
Vertical Rectangle Size ?*c#B ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓
?*c#V ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓
Pattern ID (Area Fill ID) ?*c#G
1-100 for Shading ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓
1-6 for Cross-hatch ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓
0-32767 for User-defined ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓
Fill Rectangle Area ?*c#P
Black (solid) (0) ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓
(Solid) White (erase) (1) ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓
Shaded (gray) (2) ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓
Cross-hatch Pattern (3) ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓
User-defined Pattern (4) ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓
Current Pattern (5) ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓✓
STATUS READBACK
Set Status Readback
Location Type ?*s#T ns ns ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ns ns
Set Status Readback
Location Unit ?*s#U ns ns ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ns ns
Inquire Status Readback
Entity ?*s#I ns ns ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ns ns
Free Space ?*s1M ns ns ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ns ns
Flush All Pages ?&r#F ns ns ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Echo ?*s#X ns ns ✓ ✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ns ns
✓
- Indicates a command is supported. ns - Indicates a command is not supported.
Table 1-1. PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)
Feature Set 1-19
FUNCTION COMMAND III IIID IIISi IIIP 4
4M 4Si
4SiMx 4L 4ML
4P
4MP 4PJ 4 Plus
4M Plus 4V
4MV
PICTURE FRAME (for Vector Graphics)
Picture Frame Horiz. Size ?*c#X ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Picture Frame Vert. Size ?*c#Y ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Set Picture Frame Anchor
Point ?*c0T ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
HP-GL/2 Horiz. Plot Size ?*c#K ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
HP-GL/2 Vert. Plot Size ?*c#L ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Enter HP-GL/2 ?%#B
_Stand-alone plotter (-1) ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
_Previous HP-GL (0) ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
_Current PCL CAP (1) ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
_Current PCL coordinates
and old HP-GL/2 (2) ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
_Current PCL coordi-
nates & current CAP (3) ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Enter PCL Mode ?%#A ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
PROGRAMMING HINTS
Display Functions
On ?Y✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Off ?Z✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
End-Of-Line Wrap ?&s#C ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
✓
- Indicates a command is supported. ns - Indicates a command is not supported.
Table 1-1. PCL Feature Support Matrix (continued)
1-20 Feature Set
FUNCTION COMMAND Color
LJ
Color
LJ 5,
5M 4LJ
Pro 4LC 5L
6L 5P
5MP 6P
6MP
5Si
5SiMx
Mopier 5
5M 4000
series
Desk-
Jet
1200C
Desk-
Jet
1600C
PICTURE FRAME (for Vector Graphics)
Picture Frame Horiz. Size ?*c#X ✓ns ✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Picture Frame Vert. Size ?*c#Y ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Set Picture Frame Anchor
Point ?*c0T ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
HP-GL/2 Horiz. Plot Size ?*c#K ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
HP-GL/2 Vert. Plot Size ?*c#L ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Enter HP-GL/2 ?%#B
_Stand-alone plotter (-1) ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓ns
_Previous HP-GL (0) ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
_Current PCL CAP (1) ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
_Current PCL coordinates
and old HP-GL/2 (2) ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓
_Current PCL coordi-
nates & current CAP (3) ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓
Enter PCL Mode ?%#A ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
PROGRAMMING HINTS
Display Functions
On ?Y✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Off ?Z✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
End-Of-Line Wrap ?&s#C ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
✓
- Indicates a command is supported. ns - Indicates a command is not supported.
Table 1-1. PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)
Feature Set 1-21
FUNCTION COMMAND III IIID IIISi IIIP 4
4M 4Si
4SiMx 4L 4ML
4P
4MP 4PJ 4 Plus
4M Plus 4V
4MV
PCL 5 COLOR COMMANDS
Assign Color Index ?*v#I ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Color Component 1 ?*v#A ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Color Component 2 ?*v#B ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Color Component 3 ?*v#C ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Color Lookup Tables ?*l#W[data] ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Configure Image Data ?*v#W[data] ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Download Dither Matrix ?*m#W ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Foreground Color ?*v#S ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Gamma Correction ?*t#I ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Monochrome Print Mode ?&b#M ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Palette Control ID ?&p#I ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Palette Control ?&p#C ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Push/Pop Palette ?*p#P ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Render Algorithm ?*t#J
Range: 0 - 8 ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Range: 9 - 10 ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Range: 11 - 14 ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Range: 15 - 19 ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Select Palette ?&p#S ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Set Viewing Illuminant ?*i#W[data] ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Simple Color ?*r#U ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
✓
- Indicates a command is supported. ns - Indicates a command is not supported.
Table 1-1. PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)
1-22 Feature Set
FUNCTION COMMAND Color
LJ
Color
LJ 5,
5M 4LJ
Pro 4LC 5L
6L 5P
5MP 6P
6MP
5Si
5SiMx
Mopier 5
5M 4000
series
Desk-
Jet
1200C
Desk-
Jet
1600C
PCL 5 COLOR COMMANDS
Assign Color Index ?*v#I ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓
Color Component 1 ?*v#A ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓
Color Component 2 ?*v#B ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓
Color Component 3 ?*v#C ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓
Color Lookup Tables ?*l#W[data] ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Configure Image Data ?*v#W[data] ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓
Download Dither Matrix ?*m#W ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓
Foreground Color ?*v#S ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓
Gamma Correction ?*t#I ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓
Monochrome Print Mode ?&b#M ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Palette Control ID ?&p#I ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Palette Control ?&p#C ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Push/Pop Palette ?*p#P ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓
Render Algorithm ?*t#J
Range: 0 - 8 ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓
Range: 9 - 10 ✓ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓
Range: 11 - 14 ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓
Range: 15 - 19 ns ✓ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Select Palette ?&p#S ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Set Viewing Illuminant ?*i#W[data] ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Simple Color ?*r#U ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓
✓
- Indicates a command is supported. ns - Indicates a command is not supported.
Table 1-1. PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)
Feature Set 1-23
FUNCTION COMMAND III IIID IIISi IIIP 4
4M 4Si
4SiMx 4L 4ML
4P
4MP 4PJ 4 Plus
4M Plus 4V
4MV
HP-GL/2 GRAPHICS
HP-GL/2—Commands
listed in Table A-2
except as shown below
✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Advance Full Page PG ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Bezier BR, BZ ns ns ns ns ✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Begin Plot BP ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Chord Tolerance Mode CT ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
(Relative) Color Range CR ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Download Character DL ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Fill Type FT
Odd/Even ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Non-Zero Winding ns ns ns ns ✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Frame Advance FR ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Label origin LO
1-9 / 11-19 ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
21 ns ns ns ns ✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Media Type MT ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Merge Control MC ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓ ✓ ✓
Number of Pens NP ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Output Error OE ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Output Hardcopy Limits OH ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Output Identification OI ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Output P1 and P2 OP ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Output Status OS ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Pen Color Assignment PC ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Pixel Placement PP ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓ ✓ ✓
Plot Size PS ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Quality Level QL ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns
Replot RP nsnsnsnsnsnsnsnsns ns ns
✓
- Indicates a command is supported. ns - Indicates a command is not supported.
Table 1-1. PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)
1-24 Feature Set
FUNCTION COMMAND Color
LJ
Color
LJ 5,
5M 4LJ
Pro 4LC 5L
6L 5P
5MP 6P
6MP
5Si
5SiMx
Mopier 5
5M 4000
series
Desk-
Jet
1200C
Desk-
Jet
1600C
HP-GL/2 GRAPHICS
HP-GL/2—Commands
listed in Table A-2 except
as shown below
✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Advance Full Page PG ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓✓
1ns
Bezier BR, BZ ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Begin Plot BP ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓1ns
Chord Tolerance Mode CT ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓1ns
(Relative) Color Range CR ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓
Download Character DL ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓1ns
Fill Type FT
Odd/Even ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓
Non-Zero Winding ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Frame Advance FR ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓1ns
Label origin LO
1-9 / 11-19 ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
21 ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Media Type MT ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓1ns
Merge Control MC ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Number of Pens NP ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓
Output Error OE ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓1ns
Output Hardcopy Limits OH ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓1ns
Output Identification OI ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓1ns
Output P1 and P2 OP ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓1ns
Output Status OS ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓1ns
Pen Color Assignment PC ✓✓
ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓
Pixel Placement PP ✓✓✓✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Plot Size PS ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓1ns
Quality Level QL ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓1ns
Replot RP nsnsnsnsnsnsns ns nsns ✓
1ns
✓
- Indicates a command is supported. ns - Indicates a command is not supported.
1
Supported in stand-alone HP-GL/2 Mode only (DeskJet 1200)
Table 1-1. PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)
Feature Set 1-25
Printable Area The relationships between physical page, logical page,
default picture frame, and printable area are illustrated
in Figures 1-1 and 1-2. The tables list the variations in
sizes for the different physical page sizes. For more
information concerning printable area or logical/physical
page differences, consult the PCL 5 Printer Language
Technical Reference Manual.
1-26 Feature Set
DIMENSIONS (at 300 DPI - double for 600 DPI)
PAPER SIZEABCDEFGH
Portrait Dimensions
Letter 2550 3300 2400 3300 75 0 50 150
Legal 2550 4200 2400 4200 75 0 50 150
Ledger 3300 5100 3150 5100 75 0 50 150
Executive 2175 3150 2025 3150 75 0 50 150
A4 2480 3507 2338 3507 71 0 50 150
A3 3507 4960 3365 4960 71 0 50 150
Com-10 1237 2850 1087 2850 75 0 50 150
Monarch 1162 2250 1012 2250 75 0 50 150
C5 1913 2704 1771 2704 71 0 50 150
B5 2078 2952 1936 2952 71 0 50 150
DL 1299 2598 1157 2598 71 0 50 150
JIS B4 3035 4299 2893 4299 71 0 50 150
JIS B5 2149 3035 2007 3035 71 0 50 150
Hagaki 1181 1748 1039 1748 71 0 50 150
Oufuku-hagaki 1748 2362 1606 2362 71 0 50 150
Figure 1-1. Portrait Logical Page and Printable Area Boundaries
Feature Set 1-27
DIMENSIONS (at 300 DPI - double for 600 DPI)
PAPER SIZEABCDEFGH
Landscape Dimensions
Letter 3300 2550 3180 2550 60 0 50 150
Legal 4200 2550 4080 2550 60 0 50 150
Ledger 5100 3300 4980 3300 60 0 50 150
Executive 3150 2175 3030 2175 60 0 50 150
A4 3507 2480 3389 2480 59 0 50 150
A3 4960 3507 4842 3507 59 0 50 150
Com-10 2850 1237 2730 1237 60 0 50 150
Monarch 2250 1162 2130 1162 60 0 50 150
C5 2704 1913 2586 1913 59 0 50 150
B5 2952 2078 2834 2078 59 0 50 150
DL 2598 1299 2480 1299 59 0 50 150
JIS B4 4299 3035 4181 3035 59 0 50 150
JIS B5 3035 2149 2917 2149 59 0 50 150
Hagaki 1748 1181 1630 1181 59 0 50 150
Oufuku-hagaki 2362 1748 2244 1748 59 0 50 150
Figure 1-2. Landscape Logical Page and Printable Area Boundaries
1-28 Feature Set
2
Printer-Specific Differences
Introduction Each Hewlett-Packard printer implements minor variations
of PCL 5 in order to best suit its intended use. This chapter
describes specific differences that are important when
developing applications for the various PCL 5 printers. The
sections in this chapter describe such information as new
commands not contained in the PCL 5 Printer Language
Technical Reference Manual, and other miscellaneous
differences in PCL operation particular to that printer.
HP LaserJet III and
IIID Printers With the introduction of the HP LaserJet III printer,
Hewlett-Packard introduced the PCL 5 printer language.
The PCL 5 printer language incorporated many new
features over the PCL 4 language. A few of the more
significant features included such things as the addition of
a scalable font technology, HP-GL/2 vector graphics
language support, print model features, raster graphics
enhancements, and the Print Direction command.
The HP LaserJet IIID printer language support is basically
identical to the HP LaserJet III printer except for the
addition of the duplex feature, dual input bin, envelope
feeder support and their associated commands (see
Table 1-1).
Printer-Specific Differences 2-1
HP LaserJet IIISi
Printer Several new PCL features were added to the PCL 5
language with the release of the HP LaserJet IIISi printer.
These new features are summarized in Table 2-1 below.
HP LaserJet IIIP
Printer Several new PCL features were added to the PCL 5
language with the release of the HP LaserJet IIIP printer.
These new features are summarized in Table 2-2. One new
feature listed here is adaptive compression (method 5) for
the Raster Compression Mode command. In addition to
compressing data for transmission, if certain rules are
followed (discussed below), the HP LaserJet IIIP printer
will store adaptive compressed data in compressed format
and only decompress it when required for printing. There
are certain requirements which must be met for this data to
be stored in compressed format. These requirements are
discussed following Table 2-2.
Feature Status Comments
Number of Copies
Modified Greater range, 1 to 32,767.
Page Size
Modified C5 Envelopes not supported.
Output Bin Selection Command
New Allows programmatic selection of upper or lower
output paper bins.
End Raster Graphics Command
New/Modified Modified version of the existing End Raster
Graphics command.
Job Separation
New Command Causes the paper stacker to shift positions to
offset the output paper stack.
Fonts
New Additions Four variations of Univers Condensed; ITC Zapf
Dingbats in five symbol sets.
Table 2-1. PCL Feature Additions for HP LaserJet IIISi Printer
2-2 Printer-Specific Differences
Feature/Command Status Comments
Set Compression Method
Modified Adds Adaptive Compression method to the Set
Compression Method command.
End Raster Graphics Command
Modified Modified version of the End Raster Graphics command.
User-defined Patterns
New Enables users to define and download their own user-
defined pattern.
User-defined Pattern Command
New Feature Used to download the binary data for user-defined
pattern.
Set Pattern Reference Point Command
New Sets pattern reference point.
Pattern Control Command
New Used to make user-defined patterns permanent or
temporary, or to delete them.
Select Pattern & Fill Rectangular Area
Commands
Modified Adds a parameter to support user-defined patterns.
Pattern ID Command
Modified In addition to selecting internal patterns, this command
is now used to assign an ID to a user-defined pattern as
well as to select patterns. Also, parameter range is
extended from 100 to 32,767.
User-defined Symbol Sets
New Feature Enables user to build a symbol set which contains user-
selected characters.
Define Symbol Set Command
New Identifies the characters for a user-defined symbol set.
Symbol Set ID Code Command
New Assigns a number for identification to the user-defined
symbol set.
Symbol Set Control Command
New Used to make user-defined symbol sets permanent or
temporary, or to delete them.
Unbound Scalable Fonts
New Feature Allows typefaces (unbound fonts), not just fonts (bound
fonts) to be downloaded to the printer.
Unbound Scalable Font Descriptor
New Addition of a new header used for unbound fonts (font
type 10).
Table 2-2. HP LaserJet IIIP PCL Feature Additions
Printer-Specific Differences 2-3
Raster Graphics
Adaptive
Compression (IIIP)
Adaptive compression was added to the PCL language with
the introduction of the HP LaserJet IIIP printer. Adaptive
compression (or method 5 as it is referred to) is a method
for compressing raster data using the raster Set
Compression Method command (parameter value 5). (Refer
to the Set Compression Method command in the PCL 5
Printer Language Technical Reference manual for detailed
information on using this compression technique.) Also,
refer to Chapter 4 in this document, “Raster Graphics
Adaptive Compression (Method 5)” for additional
information.
HP LaserJet 4
Printer Several new PCL features were added to the PCL 5
language with the release of the HP LaserJet 4 printer.
These new features are summarized in Table 2-3. Most of
these features are described in the revised PCL 5 Printer
Language Technical Reference Manual (part number
5961-0509). (This revised technical reference manual is
supplied as part of the Technical Reference Documentation
Package which can be obtained by ordering part number
5961-0601.) In addition, there are some additional
differences for the HP LaserJet 4 printer that are not
covered in the technical reference manual but are described
below.
Note The HP LaserJet 4M printer, in addition to PCL, contains
PostScript and a LocalTalk I/O for printing in the
Macintosh environment. PCL operation and the PCL
internal fonts for this printer are identical to the HP
LaserJet 4 printer. Thus, for PCL information for the HP
LaserJet 4M printer, refer to the HP LaserJet 4 printer
features.
2-4 Printer-Specific Differences
Feature/Command Support Comments
Adaptive Compression System
New Adaptive compression system enables the printer to
compress internal raster data when memory becomes low.
This operation occurs automatically; there are no PCL
commands for this feature (refer to Chapter 5 for ADC
information).
Configuration Command
New Allows PCL jobs to be printed (using LocalTalk or
EtherTalk MIO) using AppleTalk protocol.
Number of Copies
Modified Supports 1-32,767 copies as does the HP LaserJet IIISi
printer.
Units of Measure Command
New Allows selection of the units of measure for cursor moves,
drawing rules, and for character spacing (font metrics).
Page Size
Modified A parameter value is added for B5 envelope size; the HP
LaserJet 4 printer supports the four standard paper sizes
and five envelope sizes.
Bitmap Font Support
New Header Printer will expand 300 dpi bitmap fonts to 600 dpi. A new
300/600 dpi bitmap font descriptor has been added to
allow bitmap fonts to be created that work at either 1/300
or 1/600 inch printer resolution.
Scalable Font Support
New Header A new Universal header has been added to allow design of
typefaces of different scaling technologies to be supported
by one header. This header is used to support TrueType on
the HP LaserJet 4 printer. (This header will be used to
support any other new scaling technologies HP may add in
the future).
True Type
New TrueType scaling technology support has been added to
the printer.
Internal Typefaces
New Several new Intellifont and TrueType internal typefaces
(and supporting symbol sets) are now provided in the
printer.
Raster Resolution Command
Modified Parameter values have been added to support raster
resolutions of 200 dpi and 600 dpi.
User-defined Pattern
New Header A new 300/600 dpi user-defined pattern header has been
added to support patterns that work at either 1/300 or
1/600 inch printer resolution.
Continued on next page.
Table 2-3. PCL Feature Additions for HP LaserJet 4
Printer-Specific Differences 2-5
Feature/Command Support Comments
Status Readback
New Feature The addition of 6 new status readback commands enable
the user to receive certain information back from the
printer about fonts, symbol sets, macros, user-defined
patterns, and available memory.
Location Type Command
New Used to specify a status readback type of location
(current, all, internal, downloaded, cartridge, SIMMs).
Location Unit Command
New Specifies a status readback location unit (all, temporary
or permanent, highest-lowest priority, specific SIMM).
Inquire Entity Command
New Requests the status from the location (type and unit)
specified for fonts, symbol sets, macros, or user-defined
patterns.
Flush All Pages Command
New Allows the user to clear page data from printer memory.
Free Memory Command
New This command returns the current available memory.
Echo Command
New Allows the user to send a unique ID number to the
printer to be used as a “place holder.”
Bezier Curve Commands
New HP-GL/2 commands (relative and absolute) that allow a
user to draw complex curves with less data required
than that required for arcs.
Label Origin
Modified Label position LO 21 is provided for correct alignment of
HP-GL/2 text with PCL text.
Fill Polygon
Modified Previously, the HP-GL/2 Fill Polygon command filled
polygons using the odd/even fill technique. A second
technique, non-zero winding fill, has been added.
Macros
Modified HP-GL/2 is now supported in macros.
Configuration Command
New Added to allow the user to communicate with the MIO
card in the printer.
Table 2-3. PCL Feature Additions for HP LaserJet 4 (continued)
2-6 Printer-Specific Differences
Configuration
Command
(AppleTalk)
The Configuration command allows a user to send PCL jobs
to the printer over AppleTalk. This data is sent in the form
of “key/value” data pairs (refer to “AppleTalk
Configuration” below for more information).
?&b#W [key]<sp>[value]
# = Number of data bytes that follow command
Default = 0
Range = 0 - 32767
[key] can be 1 character through 32765 characters.
[value] can be 1 character through 32765 characters.
AppleTalk Configuration
The HP LaserJet 4 printer can be configured to receive
PCL print jobs over an AppleTalk connection using
the Configuration command. The HP LaserJet 4 MIO
AppleTalk interfaces support three key values: RENAME,
JOB, and TYPE. These keys are used for configuring an
installed LocalTalk or EtherTalk MIO card to allow PCL
print jobs generated by a Macintosh host to be printed.
Printer-Specific Differences 2-7
Notes PostScript in the HP LaserJet 4 printer supports the
PostScript level 1 operators setprintername,
AppleTalktype, and jobname, and the PostScript level 2
setdevparams operator to allow PostScript print jobs to
change the Name Binding Protocol (NBP) printer name
and printer type, as well as change the print job name.
MIO sub-system in the printer accepts a new NBP
printer name, NBP printer type, and job name from
either the PCL or PostScript personalities. The printer
passes that information across the MIO interface to the
installed MIO card which indicated support for the MIO
AppleTalk extensions. The MIO sub-system will treat the
PCL NBP type and the PostScript NBP type separately.
For information about AppleTalk Name Binding Protocol
refer to Inside AppleTalk published by Addison Wesley
Company, Inc.
RENAME
RENAME changes the printer name portion of the printer’s
AppleTalk Name Binding Protocol name field.
?&b#WRENAME<sp>printername
Valid characters for the printer name include 0-255 except
for characters $00, “@” ($40), “:” ($3A), “*” ($2A), “=” ($3D),
and $C5. The printername must contain at least one
character, and only the first 31 characters are used. If an
invalid character ($00 is not treated as an invalid
character) is contained in the printername, the printer will
ignore the escape sequence. If the printer encounters the
NULL ($00) character, the printer uses the NULL character
to terminate the printer name. All the characters preceding
the NULL will be used. If another device on the AppleTalk
network uses the same printer name, another character is
added to the end of the printer name.
The default printername is the printer model (for example,
“HP LaserJet 4”).
2-8 Printer-Specific Differences
JOB
JOB renames the current job name.
?&b#WJOB<sp>jobname
All characters are valid. For the job name the first 127
characters are used.
There is no default jobname.
TYPE
TYPE changes the type (device type) portion of the printer’s
AppleTalk Name Binding Protocol type field.
?&b#WTYPE<sp>devicetype
Valid characters for the device type include 0-255 except for
characters $00, “@” ($40), “:” ($3A), “*” ($2A), “=” ($3D), and
$C5. The devicetype must contain at least one character,
and only the first 31 characters are used. If an invalid
character ($00 is not treated as an invalid character) is
contained in the devicetype, the printer will ignore the
escape sequence. If the printer encounters the NULL ($00)
character in the devicetype, it uses the NULL character to
terminate the device type. All the characters preceding the
NULL will be used as the devicetype. If the device type is
invalid then the printer’s type is not changed.
The default device type for PCL is “HP LaserJet 4” and for
PostScript is “LaserWriter”.
Printer-Specific Differences 2-9
HP LaserJet 4Si
Printer The HP LaserJet 4Si printer is the follow-on to the HP
LaserJet IIISi printer. The HP LaserJet 4Si printer
contains many new PCL features over the HP LaserJet
IIISi. PCL support for the HP LaserJet 4Si printer is
identical to the HP LaserJet 4 printer except for the
addition of the duplex feature, dual output bin (see Table
1-1) and resource saving.
Like the HP LaserJet IIISi printer, the HP LaserJet 4Si
supports the HP LaserJet IIISi features listed in Table 2-1
with two exceptions. First, is that the HP LaserJet 4Si does
not support ITC Zapf Dingbats. Font support for the HP
LaserJet 4Si is identical to the HP LaserJet 4 printer (refer
to Chapter 3, “Internal Typefaces/Fonts and Symbol Sets,”
for complete font support information). The other exception
concerns job separation. The PCL Job Separation command
is not supported. The HP LaserJet 4Si printer handles job
separation through the control panel. If a PCL Job
Separation command is received by the printer it will be
ignored. Refer to the HP LaserJet 4Si User’s Manual (part
number C2010-90901) for additional information.
Resource saving, a new feature in the HP LaserJet 4Si
printer, allows saving information for the current language
(PCL or PostScript) when switching to the other language.
If resource saving is enabled (from the control panel or PJL;
no PCL commands are required for this operation), all the
permanent fonts, macros, and user-defined patterns plus
some other miscellaneous data is saved in a reserved
portion of printer memory. This data is stored until
the language is enabled again. When the language is
re-enabled, the stored data will be made available for use.
2-10 Printer-Specific Differences
HP LaserJet 4L
Printer The HP LaserJet 4L printer is a smaller, low-cost HP
LaserJet printer. The control panel on this printer is
limited to one button with four indicators. Many of
the control panel functions must be controlled program-
matically using Hewlett-Packard’s Printer Job Language
(refer to the Printer Job Language Technical Reference
Manual, part number 5021-0380 for detailed PJL
information).
The HP LaserJet 4L printer PCL command features are
identical to those of the HP LaserJet 4 printer PCL
features, except for some differences in parameter values
(such as for paper source—refer to Table 1-1). Additional
features which do not require PCL command control
include EconoMode and HP Memory Enhancement
technology (MEt). EconoMode causes the printer to print
less dots, thus saving toner. Memory Enhancement
technology involves some memory saving techniques to
better utilize available memory (refer to Chapter 5,
“Memory Usage” for additional information).
Typefaces in the HP LaserJet 4L printer are different from
those of the HP LaserJet 4 printer. The HP LaserJet 4
printer contains both Intellifont and TrueType scaling
technologies, but the 4L contains only Intellifont scaling
technology. Thus, the 4L does not contain any of the
TrueType typefaces, with one modification. The TrueType
Wingdings typeface has been converted to Intellifont format
and is available in the printer as an Intellifont typeface
(refer to Chapter 3, “Internal Typefaces/Fonts and Symbol
Sets” for additional information).
Printer-Specific Differences 2-11
HP LaserJet 4ML
Printer The HP LaserJet 4ML printer is similar to the HP LaserJet
4L printer, however, the 4ML includes PostScript and a
LocalTalk I/O for printing in the Macintosh environment.
The HP LaserJet 4ML printer also includes some new PCL
features: print model logical operation (ROP3) and pixel
placement, as described on the following pages.
The HP LaserJet 4ML supports the typefaces that the HP
LaserJet 4 printer supports. Several of the typefaces in the
HP LaserJet 4ML printer have additional support for the
Latin 2 and Latin 5 symbol sets (refer to Chapter 3,
“Internal Typefaces/Fonts and Symbol Sets,” for complete
font support information).
Feature Status Comments
Paper (Job) Size Command
Modified An additional parameter (101) has been added to provide
support for custom size.
Logical Operations
New Modifies the print model to allow logical operations (such as
AND, OR, XOR, NOT) to be performed on source, texture,
and destination.
Pixel Placement (PCL)
New Allows user to select either grid intersection or grid
centered placement of pixels when rendering an image in
PCL.
Pixel Placement (HP-GL/2)
New Allows user to select either grid intersection or grid
centered placement of pixels when rendering an image in
HP-GL/2.
Merge Control
New Allows the user to use logical operations (ROP’s) in
HP-GL/2.
Table 2-4. PCL Feature Additions for HP LaserJet 4ML
2-12 Printer-Specific Differences
Logical Operations With the introduction of the HP LaserJet 4ML printer the
print model was expanded to include logical operations.
The basic print model defines how a pattern, source image,
and destination image are applied to each other using the
print model’s transparent and opaque modes to produce a
resulting image (refer to the PCL 5 Printer Language
Technical Reference Manual for detailed information about
the basic print model operation). The Logical Operations
(?*l#O) command can apply logical functions (e.g., AND,
OR, XOR, NOT) to any of these operands except
transparency, which must be specified first.
The print model process consists of the following steps:
1. Specify source and/or pattern transparency modes, if
desired.
2. Specify the logical operation (or use the default).
3. Define the desired operands (source, destination,
pattern).
Definitions
Source: The source image may be one of the following:
HP-GL/2 primitives
Rules
Characters
Raster images (single plane mask or multiplane color)
Destination: The destination image contains whatever is
currently defined on the page. It includes any images
placed through previous operations.
Pattern or Texture: The pattern is defined by Current
Pattern (?*v#T). The terms pattern and texture are used
interchangeably in this section.
Printer-Specific Differences 2-13
Transparency Modes: The white pixels of the source and/or
pattern may be made transparent (source transparency 0,
pattern transparency 0). The destination shows through
these areas.
Transparency modes are set by the Source Transparency
(?*v#N) and Pattern Transparency (?*v#O) commands
(refer to the PCL 5 Printer Language Technical Reference
Manual).
The print model allows logical operations, such as AND,
OR, XOR, NOT, to be performed on source, texture, and
destination images. Transparency modes and Logical
Operation must be specified before printable data is sent.
Operators
Source Transparency (specified before logical operation;
default is transparent)
Pattern Transparency (specified before logical operation;
default is transparent)
Logical Operators (default is Texture OR Source)
Operands
Source objects: character cell, raster image, rule,
HP-GL/2 vectors and polygons
Texture: pattern mask
Destination: current page definition
Assuming three bits per pixel, the following diagram shows
the print model process.
2-14 Printer-Specific Differences
Notes The Logical Operation command (?*l#O) provides 255
possible logical operations. All of these logic operations
map directly to their ROP3 (raster operation)
counterparts (see the Microsoft Document, Reference,
Volume 2, Chapter 11, Binary and Ternary Raster
Operation Codes).
The logical operations were defined by Microsoft
Windows for an RGB color space (a ‘‘1’’ is white and a “0”
is black).
Logical Operations
and Transparency
Interactions
As described above, transparency modes operate in addition
to logical operations. The logical operations in Table 2-5,
Logical Operations (ROP3), on the following pages, are true
only if source and pattern transparency (for white pixels)
are explicitly set to opaque (?*v1N and ?*v1O). If source
and/or pattern transparency modes are transparent
(defaulted), the additional operations shown on the
following page must be performed to achieve the final
result.
Printer-Specific Differences 2-15
The four basic interactions are:
Case 1: Source and Pattern are opaque.
Return ROP3 ( Dest, Src, Texture ).
Case 2: Source is opaque, Pattern is transparent.
Temporary_ROP3 = ROP3 ( Dest, Src, Texture ).
Image_A = Temporary_ROP3, & Not Src.
Image_B = Temporary_ROP3 & Pattern.
Image_C = Not Pattern & Src & Dest.
Return Image_A | Image_B | Image_C
Case 3: Source is transparent, Pattern is opaque.
Temporary_ROP3 = ROP3 ( Dest, Src, Texture ).
Image_A = Temporary_ROP3 & Src.
Image_B = Dest & Not Src.
Return Image_A | Image_B
Case 4: Source and Pattern are transparent
Temporary_ROP3 = ROP3 ( Dest, Src, Texture ).
Image_A = Temporary_ROP3 & Src & Pattern.
Image_B = Dest & Not Src.
Image_C = Dest & Not Pattern.
Return Image_A | Image_B | Image_C.
2-16 Printer-Specific Differences
Logical Operation
Command Specifies the logical operation to be performed in RGB color
space on the destination, source and texture to produce new
destination data.
?*l#O
# = Logical operation value (see Table 2-6)
Default = 252 (TSo)
Range = 0 to 255
Note When source and/or pattern transparency modes are set
opaque (not defaulted), values specified by this command
map directly to the ROP3 (raster operation) table values on
the following page. However, when source and/or pattern
transparency modes are set transparent, the additional
operations shown on the previous page must be performed
to achieve the final result.
Logical operations in the table are shown in RPN (reverse
polish notation). For example, the value 225 corresponds to
TDSoxn, the logical function of
NOT (texture XOR (source OR destination))
Notes This command is the PCL Version of the HP-GL/2 MC
command.
This command sets the ROP value which affects not only
PCL operation but also the HP-GL/2 ROP value.
Printer-Specific Differences 2-17
Example: The Logical Operation default value is 252 (TSo),
corresponding to a logical function of:
(texture | source)
The result is computed below for both case 1 (source
and pattern opaque) and case 4 (source and pattern
transparent) on the previous page. Note that the ROP3
value of 252 results only with case 1, when both source and
pattern transparency modes are set to opaque.
Each column of destination, source, and texture values are
the input to the logical function. The result, 252, is the
value that would be sent to identify the logical operation
(source and pattern transparency modes are opaque). The
last row, “ROP3 + Transparencies (source & pattern are
transparent)” shows the result if source and pattern
transparency modes are transparent (the default
transparency mode).
Bits
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Texture 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
Source 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
Destination 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
ROP3 (source & pattern are opaque) 11111100
(decimal 252)
ROP3 +Transparencies
(source & pattern are transparent) 11101010
Table 2-5. Logical Operation (ROP3)
2-18 Printer-Specific Differences
Table of Logical Operations
Table 2-6, Logical Operations (ROP3), shows the mapping
between input values and their logical operations. Note
that the logical operations are specified as RPN (reverse
polish notation) equations. Here is a key to describe what
the Boolean Function values mean;
S = Source a = AND
T = Texture o = OR
D = Destination n = NOT
x = EXCLUSIVE OR
Note Since logical operations are interpreted in RGB space
(white = 1 and black = 0) rather than in CMY space
(white = 0 and black = 1), the results may not be intuitive.
For example, ORing a white object with a black object in
RGB space yields a white object. This is the same as
ANDing the two objects in CMY space. It must be remem-
bered that the printer operates in something similar to a
CMY space and inverts the bits and reverses the order.
Printer-Specific Differences 2-19
Input Value
Boolean Function
Input Value
Boolean Function
0 0 27 SDTSxaxn
1 DTSoon 28 TSDTaox
2 DTSona 29 DSTDxaxn
3 TSon 30 TDSox
4 SDTona 31 TDSoan
5 DTon 32 DTSnaa
6 TDSxnon 33 SDTxon
7 TDSaon 34 DSna
8 SDTnaa 35 STDnaon
9 TDSxon 36 STxDSxa
10 DTna 37 TDSTanaxn
11 TSDnaon 38 SDTSaox
12 STna 39 SDTSxnox
13 TDSnaon 40 DTSxa
14 TDSonon 41 TSDTSaoxxn
15 Tn 42 DTSana
16 TDSona 43 SSTxTDxaxn
17 DSon 44 STDSoax
18 SDTxnon 45 TSDnox
19 SDTaon 46 TSDTxox
20 DTSxnon 47 TSDnoan
21 DTSaon 48 TSna
22 TSDTSanaxx 49 SDTnaon
23 SSTxDSxaxn 50 SDTSoox
24 STxTDxa 51 Sn
25 SDTSanaxn 52 STDSaox
26 TDSTaox 53 STDSxnox
Table 2-6. Logical Operations (ROP3)
2-20 Printer-Specific Differences
Input Value
Boolean Function
Input Value Boolean Function
54 SDTox 81 DSTnaon
55 SDToan 82 DTSDaox
56 TSDToax 83 STDSxaxn
57 STDnox 84 DTSonon
58 STDSxox 85 Dn
59 STDnoan 86 DTSox
60 TSx 87 DTSoan
61 STDSonox 88 TDSToax
62 STDSnaox 89 DTSnox
63 TSan 90 DTx
64 TSDnaa 91 DTSDonox
65 DTSxon 92 DTSDxox
66 SDxTDxa 93 DTSnoan
67 STDSanaxn 94 DTSDnaox
68 SDna 95 DTan
69 DTSnaon 96 TDSxa
70 DSTDaox 97 DSTDSaoxxn
71 TSDTxaxn 98 DSTDoax
72 SDTxa 99 SDTnox
73 TDSTDaoxxn 100 SDTSoax
74 DTSDoax 101 DSTnox
75 TDSnox 102 DSx
76 SDTana 103 SDTSonox
77 SSTxDSxoxn 104 DSTDSonoxxn
78 TDSTxox 105 TDSxxn
79 TDSnoan 106 DTSax
80 TDna 107 TSDTSoaxxn
Table 2-6. Logical Operations (ROP3) continued
Printer-Specific Differences 2-21
Input Value
Boolean Function
Input Value Boolean Function
108 SDTax 135 TDSaxn
109 TDSTDoaxxn 136 DSa
110 SDTSnoax 137 SDTSnaoxn
111 TDSxnan 138 DSTnoa
112 TDSana 139 DSTDxoxn
113 SSDxTDxaxn 140 SDTnoa
114 SDTSxox 141 SDTSxoxn
115 SDTnoan 142 SSDxTDxax
116 DSTDxox 143 TDSanan
117 DSTnoan 144 TDSxna
118 SDTSnaox 145 SDTSnoaxn
119 DSan 146 DTSDToaxx
120 TDSax 147 STDaxn
121 DSTDSoaxxn 148 TSDTSoaxx
122 DTSDnoax 149 DTSaxn
123 SDTxnan 150 DTSxx
124 STDSnoax 151 TSDTSonoxx
125 DTSxnan 152 SDTSonoxn
126 STxDSxo 153 DSxn
127 DTSaan 154 DTSoaxn
128 DTSaa 155 SDTSoaxn
129 STxDSxon 156 STDnax
130 DTSxna 157 DSTDoaxn
131 STDSnoaxn 158 DSTDSaoxx
132 SDTxna 159 TDSxan
133 TDSTnoaxn 160 DTa
134 DSTDSoaxx 161 TDSTnaoxn
Table 2-6. Logical Operations (ROP3) continued
2-22 Printer-Specific Differences
Input Value
Boolean Function
Input Value Boolean Function
162 DTSnoa 189 SDxTDxan
163 DTSDxoxn 190 DTSxo
164 TDSTonoxn 191 DTSano
165 TDxn 192 TSa
166 DSTnax 193 STDSnaoxn
167 TDSToaxn 194 STDSonoxn
168 DTSoa 195 TSxn
169 DTSoxn 196 STDnoa
170 D 197 STDSxoxn
171 DTSono 198 SDTnax
172 STDSxax 199 TSDToaxn
173 DTSDaoxn 200 SDToa
174 DSTnao 201 STDoxn
175 DTno 202 DTSDxax
176 TDSnoa 203 STDSaoxn
177 TDSTxoxn 204 S
178 SSTxDSxox 205 SDTono
179 SDTanan 206 SDTnao
180 TSDnax 207 STno
181 DTSDoaxn 208 TSDnoa
182 DTSDTaoxx 209 TSDTxoxn
183 SDTxan 210 TDSnax
184 TSDTxax 211 STDSoaxn
185 DSTDaoxn 212 SSTxTDxax
186 DTSnao 213 DTSanan
187 DSno 214 TSDTSaoxx
188 STDSanax 215 DTSxan
Table 2-6. Logical Operations (ROP3) continued
Printer-Specific Differences 2-23
Input Value
Boolean Function
Input Value Boolean Function
216 TDSTxax 236 SDTao
217 SDTSaoxn 237 SDTxno
218 DTSDanax 238 DSo
219 STxDSxan 239 SDTnoo
220 STDnao 240 T
221 SDno 241 TDSono
222 SDTxo 242 TDSnao
223 SDTano 243 TSno
224 TDSoa 244 TSDnao
225 TDSoxn 245 TDno
226 DSTDxax 246 TDSxo
227 TSDTaoxn 247 TDSano
228 SDTSxax 248 TDSao
229 TDSTaoxn 249 TDSxno
230 SDTSanax 250 DTo
231 STxTDxan 251 DTSnoo
232 SSTxDSxax 252 TSo
233 DSTDSanaxxn 253 TSDnoo
234 DTSao 254 DTSoo
235 DTSxno 255 1
Table 2-6. Logical Operations (ROP3) continued
2-24 Printer-Specific Differences
Pixel Placement
Command This command determines how pixels are rendered in
images.
?*l # R
# = 0 - Grid intersection
1 - Grid centered
Default = 0
Range = 0, 1 (command is ignored for other
values)
Two models are used for rendering pixels when an image is
placed on paper:
Grid Intersection Model
Grid Centered Model
This command can be invoked multiple times during a
page. It has no effect except to switch the model being used
for imaging.
Note The PCL Pixel Placement command determines how pixels
are placed for both PCL and HP-GL/2 operation.
Printer-Specific Differences 2-25
The example shown in Figure 2-1 illustrates the concepts
of the two models. Assume a rectangle extends from
coordinate position (1,1) to position (3,4). As shown below,
each model produces a different result. (Since PCL printers
print only at intersections, grid centered pixel placement is
implemented as shown on the right.)
The grid centered model produces a rectangle that is one
dot row thinner and one dot row shorter than the grid
intersection model. The grid intersection model is the PCL
default.
Note The grid centered method is used by Microsoft Windows.
Figure 2-1. Pixel Placement
2-26 Printer-Specific Differences
Placement Variations
PCL and HP-GL/2 (see following pages for HP-GL/2 pixel
placement command description) provide two pixel
placement modes: grid intersection (the default) and grid
centered. Grid intersection places pixels on the
intersections of the grid (see Figure 2-2). Grid centered
places pixels in the center of the grid. In Figure 2-2, a
rectangle extends from position (1,1) to (3,4). The grid
centered model produces a rectangle one dot thinner and
one dot shorter then the grid intersection model.
When rectangular area fills are used and grid intersection
is used, an overlapping of pixels can occur if rectangular
area fills are placed adjacent to one another (as shown
below). Depending on the raster operation presently in
effect, this overlap can produce undesirable results in the
final printed image. To avoid this problem, use the grid
centered method.
Note Since PCL printers print only at intersections, grid centered
is implemented as shown on the right.
Figure 2-2. Pixel Placement Variations
Printer-Specific Differences 2-27
Pixel Placement
Command (HP-GL/2) The Pixel Placement (PP) command controls how pixels are
placed on the layout grid during polygon fills. Two pixel
placement modes are grid intersection or grid centered.
PP [mode] ;
mode
0 = grid intersection; device draws pixels
centered at grid intersections (see
Figure 2-1).
1 = grid centered; device draws pixels centered
inside the boxes created by the grid (see
Figure 2-1).
The command is the HP-GL/2 version of the PCL Pixel
Placement command. Whatever mode is selected, using the
HP-GL/2 PP command also applies to PCL operation.
Likewise the PCL Pixel Placement command also affects
HP-GL/2 pixel placement.
Notes Microsoft Windows fills polygons based on grid centered
method.
This command determines how pixels will be placed for
both HP-GL/2 and PCL operation.
The PP command is not defaulted by an IN command.
Parameter Format Functional Range Default
mode clamped integer 0 or 1 0 (grid intersection)
Pixel Placement Command (HP-GL/2)
2-28 Printer-Specific Differences
Merge Control
Command (HP-GL/2) The Merge Control (MC) command specifies the raster
operation (ROP’s) to be performed in HP-GL/2. Raster
Operations specify how source, destination, and patterns
are combined to produce final images. This command
supports all 256 Microsoft Windows ternary (ROP3)
raster-operation codes.
MC [mode, [opcode] ] ;
1
For opcode ROP values refer to Table 2-6, Logical Operation.
mode
0 = opcode value is ignored; printer sets ROP to 252.
1 = opcode value is used as the ROP value. If no
opcode value is sent, printer sets ROP to 168. If
opcode is out of range (some value other then
0-255), the command is ignored and the default
ROP of 252 is used. (For example: MC1,60;
MC1,60-; MC1,+60; MC1,60+; all set the ROP to
60; however, MC1,-60; or MC1,300; set the ROP
to the default value (252).
Notes This command is the HP-GL/2 version of the PCL Logical
Operation command.
This command sets a ROP value which affects not only
HP-GL/2 operation but also the PCL ROP value.
The MC command is defaulted by an IN command.
Parameter Format Functional Range Default
mode clamped integer 0 or 1 0 (ROP 252)
opcode clamped integer 0...2551 168, 252
Merge Control Command (HP-GL/2)
Printer-Specific Differences 2-29
Note When using the MC command, some pattern types will not
produce the expected ROP result. This only occurs when
using the FT (Fill Type) command pattern types 1, 2, 3, and
4, and the ROP includes an XOR operation. (This problem
is due to the fact that these patterns are the result of a
vector operation and do not produce raster data for use by a
ROP operation.) All other Fill Type command patterns
(types, 10, 11, 21, or 22) operate as expected.
opcode
The operation code (opcode) specifies the logical operations
that are performed on a source, destination, and patterned
image prior to drawing the final image. The opcodes are
created by listing all possible combinations of a single
pattern, source and destination pixel, and constructing the
desired final pixel values. The following table shows three
common opcodes (also see Table 2-6).
Pixel Combinations Desired Destination Values
Pattern Pixel Source Pixel Destination
Pixel Source
Overwrite Transparency
(TR
command)
Source
Destination
000000
001011
010111
011110
100000
101011
110111
111110
Resulting Opcode 204 (0xCC) 238 (0xEE) 102 (0x66)
Table 2-7. Common Opcodes
2-30 Printer-Specific Differences
HP LaserJet 4P
and 4MP Printers The HP LaserJet 4P printer is the follow-on to the HP
LaserJet IIIP printer. The HP LaserJet 4MP printer is the
multi-platform (PostScript) version of the 4P printer. PCL
operation and the internal fonts in these two printers are
identical to that of the HP LaserJet 4ML printer. The 4P
and 4MP printers have a control panel unlike the 4L and
4ML printers. Refer to Table 1-1, PCL Feature Support
Matrix, for the commands these printers support and to
Chapter 3, “Internal Typefaces/Fonts and Symbol Sets,” for
font support information.
Printer-Specific Differences 2-31
HP LaserJet 4PJ
Printer The HP LaserJet 4PJ printer is a modified version of the
HP LaserJet 4P printer designed specifically for the
Japanese market. The enhanced PCL 5 printer language in
this printer includes all of the PCL 5 features of the HP
LaserJet 4P, plus special features which specifically support
the Asian printing market. These features include large
font support, support for vertical printing, and the ESC/P
printer language. Table 2-8 lists the PCL feature additions
for this printer.
Feature Status Comments
Text Parsing Method Command
New Provides a method for specifying character
codes to select characters in large fonts (> 256
characters).
Character Text Path Direction Command
New Allows vertical printing for Asian markets,
which use both horizontal and vertical printing.
Font Header Format
Modified Adds Font Format 16, a font header which
supports large TrueType fonts. Five new font
header segments are supported.
Fonts
New Additions
and Deletions The resident typefaces are different than those
in the HP LaserJet 4P printer. Two large fonts
(fonts containing a large number of characters)
are included to support the Japanese market:
MS Mincho and MS Gothic. The printer also
contains some Western TrueType typefaces
(Arial and Times Roman families). The printer
does not have any Intellifont typefaces except
the Courier family.
Page Size Command
New Additions Adds support for JIS B5 paper (?&l45A) and
two Japanese postcard sizes: Hagaki (?&l71A)
and Oufuku-Hagaki (?&l72A).
Character Enhancements
New Allows pseudo-bold and pseudo-italic
enhancements to be applied to MS Mincho, MS
Gothic, and certain downloaded TrueType fonts.
Table 2-8. PCL Feature Additions for HP LaserJet 4PJ
2-32 Printer-Specific Differences
Descriptions of the Text Parsing Method Command,
Character Text Path Direction Command, and Font Format
16 are provided in the following paragraphs. Following
that, a “LaserJet 4PJ Programming Tips” section offers
examples and tips for performing specific tasks using PCL 5.
Text Parsing Method
Command The Text Parsing Method command informs the PCL parser
whether character codes should be interpreted as 1-byte or
2-byte character codes as described below.
?&t#P
# = 0, 1 - All character codes are processed as
one-byte characters.
21 - Character codes are processed as one-byte
or two-byte characters as described below.
31 - Character codes are processed as one-byte
or two-byte characters as described below.
38 - Character codes are processed as one-byte
or two-byte characters as described below.
Default = 0 or 31 (if the default symbol set is
WIN31J, the value is 31; otherwise it is 0)
Range = 0, 1, 21, 31, 38
If the value field is 21, character codes in the range
0x21-0xFF are processed as the first byte of a two-byte
character. The following byte is processed as the second
byte of the two-byte character. All character codes outside
this range are processed as one-byte values. This method
can be used for parsing characters in Asian seven-bit
encoding specifications, including JIS X0208 (Japan), GB
2312-80 (China), and KS C 5601-1992 (Korea).
If the value field is 31, character codes in the range
0x81-0x9F and 0xE0-0xFC are processed as the first byte of
a two-byte character. The following byte is processed as the
second byte of the two-byte character. All character codes
outside this range are processed as one-byte values. This
Printer-Specific Differences 2-33
method can be used for parsing characters in the Shift-JIS
encoding specification.
If the value field is 38, character codes in the range
0x80-0xFF are processed as the first byte of a two-byte
character. The following byte is processed as the second
byte of the two-byte character. All character codes outside
this range are processed as one-byte values. This
method can be used for parsing Asian eight-bit encoding
specifications, such as the Big Five and TCA encoding
specifications (Taiwan), and KS C 5601-1992 and GB
2312-80, which can be either 7 or 8 bit.
Character Text Path
Direction Command This command allows the user to vertically rotate text for
use in vertical writing applications.
?&c#T
# = 0 - Horizontal printing
–1 - Vertical rotated printing
Default = 0
Range = 0, 1
Using ?&c0T, the printer’s current active position (CAP)
advances left to right, and linefeed advances top to bottom
with horizontal, upright characters.
Using ?&c–1T, the following actions occur:
Full-width characters in large fonts are rotated
counter-clockwise 90 degrees (“vertical rotated”
characters).
Vertical substitutes are made for characters which
change their appearance, orientation, or positioning
when written vertically.
All other characters are unaffected by this setting.
The vertical-rotated printing mode (?&c-1T) has the
effect of transforming a portrait page with horizontal
text into a landscape page with vertical text. The PCL
Print Direction command can be used to achieve other
text orientations.
2-34 Printer-Specific Differences
Vertical substitution characters are those characters which
change their appearance, orientation, or positioning when
written vertically. Examples in Japanese fonts include
parentheses, brackets, punctuation and small kana. In the
example above, the two small characters are replaced with
vertical substitutes. Vertical substitution characters are
accessed through the Vertical Substitutes Character
Segment, which is described in more detail later in this
chapter.
Font Header
Format 16 The HP LaserJet 4PJ printer provides support for large
fonts. Large fonts, such as the MS Mincho and MS Gothic
fonts supplied in the printer, are fonts which are bound to
large symbol sets. The LaserJet 4PJ printer supports a new
font header to accomodate large bound fonts. New segments
are provided for support of vertical substitutes, galley
characters, typeface strings, and character enhancements.
The Font Header Command, described beginning on page
11-6 of the PCL 5 Printer Language Technical Reference
Manual, has several different header formats. The support
of large fonts adds Font Header Format 16 (Universal Font
Header). Font Header Format 16 is identical in structure to
format 15 (Universal Scalable Font Header) except that the
size field for data segments has been enlarged from 16 bits
to 32 bits, and a new Font Type has been added for large
fonts (Font Type 3).
Printer-Specific Differences 2-35
New Font Format
Header Segments For the HP LaserJet 4PJ printer, Font Header Format 15
has been extended to include optional data segments for
supporting galley characters, typeface strings, and
character enhancements. Font Format 16 supports these
segments plus optional segments for supporting vertical
substitution and a vertical rotation offset. (Segmented Font
Data is described beginning on page 11-45 of the PCL 5
Printer Language Technical Reference Manual.)
Galley Character Segment
If an application requests a character that does not exist
within the current font, the printer checks the Galley
Character Segment for a substitute character to print.
Vertical Substitution Character Segment
The Vertical Substitution Character Segment is used to
identify vertical substitute glyphs for characters which
change their appearance, orientation, or positioning when
written vertically.
Typeface String Segment
The Typeface String Segment allows names of permanent
downloaded fonts to be displayed, using non-Latin
characters, in the appropriate typeface on the Typeface List.
Vertical Rotation Segment
When the character text path direction is set to vertical
rotation, full-width characters are rotated counter-clockwise
90°. The Vertical Rotation Segment sets the point around
which the character rotates, so that character alignment is
compatible with the way Windows 3.1J rotates characters.
Character Enhancement Segment
The HP LaserJet 4PJ printer can apply pseudo-bold and
pseudo-italic enhancements to MS Mincho, MS Gothic, and
certain downloaded TrueType fonts. This segment is used to
indicate that a particular downloaded font is able to have
these character enhancements applied.
2-36 Printer-Specific Differences
Table 2-9. Printer Segment Support for Font Format 16
Segment LJ 4PJ LJ 4V/
4MV LJ 4LC LJ 4LJ
Pro DJ 1600 LJ 5P
Galley Character – GC ✓✓✓✓✓✓
Vertical Substitution – VT ✓✓✓✓✓✓
Typeface string – TF ✓✓✓✓✓ns
Vertical Rotation – VR ✓✓✓✓✓✓
Character Enhancement – CE ✓✓✓✓✓✓
Bitmap Resolution – BR * ns ✓✓✓ns ✓
TrueType fonts ✓✓✓✓✓✓
Bitmap fonts * ns ✓✓✓ns ✓
ns – not supported
*
Format 16 bitmap font support is described beginning on page 2-63.
Description of Font
Header Segments Each font header data segment contains three parts:
Segment Identifier
Data Segment Size
Data Segment
Segment Identifier Values
The Segment Identifier Values for the Galley Character,
Vertical Substitution Character, Typeface String, Vertical
Rotation, and Character Enhancement Segments are as
shown in the following table.
Value Mnemonic* Data Segment
18243 GC Galley Character Segment
22100 VT Vertical Substitute Segment
21574 TF Typeface String Segment
22098 VR Vertical Rotation Segment
17221 CE Character Enhancement Segment
* The mnemonic is obtained when the two bytes of this big-endian word are treated as
ASCII characters.
Printer-Specific Differences 2-37
Data Segment Size
The Data Segment Size indicates the number of bytes in
the immediately following Data Segment. The size of this
field is 4 bytes for Font Format 16 fonts, and 2 bytes for
Font Format 15 fonts. The rest of the data segments are
identical for both font formats.
Galley Character Segment
If an application requests a character that does not exist
within the current font, the printer checks the Galley
Character Segment for a substitute character to print
instead. The Galley Character Segment specifies the
character codes of the substitute characters to be printed.
A different galley character can be specified for different
regions of the symbol set. For example, this segment can
be set up so that an asterisk prints when a non-existent
character is selected in the region 0x81 - 0x9F, and a
question mark for characters in the region 0xE0-0xFC.
Byte 15 (MSB) 8 7 (LSB) 0 Byte
0 GC (18243) 1
2
4Data Segment Size (6*n+6) * 3
5
6 Format = 0 7
8 Default Galley Character 9
10 Number of Regions (n) 11
12 Region #1 Upper Left Character Code 13
14 Region #1 Lower Right Character Code 15
16 Region #1 Galley Character 17
. . . . . .
6*n+6 Region #n Upper Left Character Code 6*n+7
6*n+8 Region #n Lower Right Character Code 6*n+9
6*n+10 Region #n Galley Character 6*n+11
* This segment is for Font Format 16. The Data Segment Size field for Font Format 16
fonts is 4 bytes; the segment for Font Format 15 fonts is identical except the Data
Segment Size field is 2 bytes instead.
2-38 Printer-Specific Differences
Default Galley Character (UI). Character code of the
character to be printed when a specified character is not
within any of the defined regions.
Number of Regions (UI). Number of regions for which
galley characters are defined. Regions are defined for a
table in which the first character code byte specifies the
row and the second byte specifies the column.
Region #x Upper Left Character Code (UI).
Character code defining upper left corner of Region #x.
Region #x Lower Right Character Code (UI).
Character code defining lower right corner of Region #x.
Region #x Galley Character (UI). Character code of
the character to be printed when a character within
Region #x is missing from the selected font.
If the value of the galley character field is 0xFFFF, then if
the font contains a missing character glyph, that glyph is
printed. The missing character glyph can be downloaded
using the PCL Download Character command with a
character code = 0xFFFF and a glyph ID = 0.
If both the character specified by the original character code
and by the galley character code are missing, the CAP is
advanced in accordance with previous PCL rules for
missing characters, that is, it is advanced according to the
current setting of HMI (Horizontal Motion Index).
The Galley Character Segment will be invalid if the format
number is not supported or if the segment size declared in
the Segment Size field is larger or smaller than required for
the number of regions (N). If the segment is invalid, the
font download will be ignored.
Galley Character Segments can be downloaded with any
Font Format 15 or 16 font, regardless of font type.
The Galley Character Segment can be used to implement a
requirement of the Microsoft Windows Version 3.1, Japanese
Version, Microsoft Standard Character Set Specification
(March 11, 1993), which states “when there is an output
request for a character of a specified typeface, even if the
glyph corresponding to the specified character code does not
Printer-Specific Differences 2-39
exist, some glyph data will be output. For double-byte
characters, the glyph of the default character defined for
the given TrueType font is used. For single-byte characters,
the glyph at 0xA5 (small dot, U+FF65) is used.”
The following table shows a Galley Character Segment
which follows the Japanese Windows specification.
Byte 15 (MSB) 8 7 (LSB) 0 Byte
0 GC (18243) 1
2
4Data Segment Size (12) * 3
5
6 Format = 0 7
8 Default Galley Character = 0xFFFF 9
10 Number of Regions (n) = 1 11
12 Region #1 Upper Left
Character Code = 0x0000 13
14 Region #1 Lower Right
Character Code = 0x00FF 15
16 Region #1 Galley Character = 0x00A5 17
* This segment is for Font Format 16. The Data Segment Size field for Font Format 16
fonts is 4 bytes; the segment for Font Format 15 fonts is identical except the Data
Segment Size field is 2 bytes instead.
In this example segment, there is one galley character
region. This region is applied to all one-byte characters
(character codes 0x0000-0x00FF); any missing character in
this region is replaced with the character at character code
location 0x00A5. Any missing characters falling into this
region (e.g. character codes 0x0100 - 0xFFFF) are replaced
with the default galley character. Since in this example the
Default Galley Character field = 0xFFFF, the missing
character glyph is printed if it is present in the font.
2-40 Printer-Specific Differences
Vertical Substitution Segment
The Vertical Substitution Segment contains pairs of glyph
IDs. Each pair specifies the horizontal and vertical glyph ID
for a character. The segment can be built directly from a
TrueType mort table which contains a vertical substitution
array. The segment definition is shown in the table below.
Byte 15 (MSB) 8 7 (LSB) 0 Byte
0 VT (22100) 1
2
4Data Segment Size (4*n+4) * 3
5
6 Horizontal Glyph ID #1 7
8 Vertical Glyph ID #1 9
. . . . . .
4*n+2 Horizontal Glyph ID #n 4*n+3
4*n+4 Vertical Glyph ID #n 4*n+5
4*n+6 End of table mark #1 = 0xFFFF 4*n+7
4*n+8 End of table mark #2 = 0xFFFF 4*n+9
The Horizontal Glyph ID field is used by TrueType as an ID
number for the horizontal glyph data associated with a
given character. The Vertical Glyph ID field contains the ID
number for the vertical glyph data associated with the
same character.
The vertical glyphs can be downloaded using the PCL
Character Definition Command using a character code =
0xFFFF.
A TrueType mort table typically contains a header of 76
bytes, followed by the vertical substitution array which
follows the segment format described here. However, the
mort table header is designed to be variable-length, and the
location of the vertical substitution data may be located
elsewhere in mort tables in future fonts.
If the Font Type is not Type 3 (16-bit fonts), this data
segment is ignored.
Printer-Specific Differences 2-41
If the value pairs are not sorted by horizontal glyph ID, the
data segment is invalid. If the End of Table mark #1 is not
0xFFFF, the data segment is invalid. The location of the
end of the table is determined using the Data Segment Size
field. If the segment is invalid, the font download is ignored.
Typeface String Segment
The purpose of this segment is to provide a substitute
string to print for a permanent downloaded font when doing
a PCL Typeface List printout. It has the following structure:
Byte 15 (MSB) 8 7 (LSB) 0 Byte
0 TF (21574) 1
2
4Data Segment Size (2*n+2) * 3
5
6 Embedded Font
Name Flag Substitute String
Length (n) 7
8 Substitute String Character List 9
. . . . . .
* This segment is for Font Format 16. The Data Segment Size field for Font Format 16
fonts is 4 bytes; the segment for Font Format 15 fonts is identical except the Data
Segment Size field is 2 bytes instead.
Embedded Font Name Flag (UB)—A zero value in this field
is used to indicate that the ASCII name of the font (from
the Font Name field) should be printed in addition to the
substitute string. A non-zero value is used to indicate that
only the substitute string should be printed.
Substitute String Length (UB)—the number of UI
characters in the Substitute String Character List.
Substitute String Character List (array of UI)—the
characters which make up the substitute string. Each
character is represented as a UI value. If the font is a
bound font, then the values are accessed by their
character codes values; if the font is unbound, then the
Unicode index numbers (see Appendix D) are used.
2-42 Printer-Specific Differences
The Typeface String Segment will be invalid if the Data
Segment Size declared in the Data Segment Size field is
larger or smaller than required for substitute string length,
or if the Data Segment Size is an odd number of bytes. If
the segment is invalid, the font download will be ignored.
Typeface String Segments can be downloaded with any
Font Format 15 or Font Format 16 font, regardless of font
type.
The following tables are examples of Typeface String
Segments for two downloaded fonts. The first is for MS
Mincho, and has the embedded font name flag set to true.
The second is for MS Gothic, and has the embedded font
name flag set to false.
Printer-Specific Differences 2-43
MS Mincho
Byte 15 (MSB) 8 7 (LSB) 0 Byte
0 TF (21574) 1
2
4Data Segment
Size (10) * 3
5
6 Embedded Font
Name Flag = 1 Substitute String
Length = 4 7
8
10
12
14
Substitute String Character List =
0x826c (Note: these are full-width
0x8272 Shift-JIS character codes
0x96be for “MS” and Kanji
0x92a9 “Mincho” )
9
11
13
15
MS Gothic
Byte 15 (MSB) 8 7 (LSB) 0 Byte
0 TF (21574) 1
2
4Data Segment
Size (14) * 3
5
6 Embedded Font
Name Flag = 0 Substitute String
Length = 6 7
8
10
12
14
16
18
Substitute String Character List =
0x826c (Note: these are full-width
0x8272 Shift-JIS character codes
0x8353 for “MS” and Katakana for
0x8356 “Gothic” )
0x8362
0x834e
9
11
13
15
17
19
* This segment is for Font Format 16. The Data Segment Size field for Font Format 16
fonts is 4 bytes; the segment for Font Format 15 fonts is identical except the Data
Segment Size field is 2 bytes instead.
2-44 Printer-Specific Differences
The following illustration shows how the PCL Typeface List
would look.
Vertical Rotation Segment
The Vertical Rotation Segment is used to define the lower
boundary of the rotation box used when the character text
path direction is set to vertical rotation. This is an optional
segment which may be downloaded with Font Format 16
TrueType fonts.
The following illustration shows an example of character
rotation. The boxes around each character represent the
vertical rotation box. The distance between the baseline
and the bottom of the character box is represented by the
Descender value in the Vertical Rotation Segment.
Printer-Specific Differences 2-45
The structure of the Vertical Rotation Segment is:
Byte 15 (MSB) 8 7 (LSB) 0 Byte
0 VR (22098) 1
2
4Data Segment Size (4) * 3
5
6 Format (0) 7
8 Descender value 9
* This segment is for Font Format 16. The Data Segment Size field for Font Format 16
fonts is 4 bytes; the segment for Font Format 15 fonts is identical except the Data
Segment Size field is 2 bytes instead.
Format (UINT16)—Set this value to 0.
Descender Value (SINT16)—Set this value to equal the
“sTypoDescender” value from the “OS/2” table of the
TrueType font.
2-46 Printer-Specific Differences
If the Vertical Rotation Segment is not downloaded with
the font definition, a default value is used for the
Descender value. The default value is set to the following:
Descender value = -36/256 * ScaleFactor
Where: ScaleFactor is Bytes 64 and 65 from the
Font Format 16 Font Header.
Character Enhancement Segment
This segment indicates whether the pseudo-bold or
pseudo-italic enhancements can be performed on a
downloaded font.
The structure of the Character Enhancement Segment is:
Byte 15 (MSB) 8 7 (LSB) 0 Byte
0 CE (17221) 1
2 Data Segment Size (8) 3
45
6 Style 7
89
10 Stroke Weight 11
12 Reserved 13
* This segment is for Font Format 16. The Data Segment Size field for Font Format 16
fonts is 4 bytes; the segment for Font Format 15 fonts is identical except the Data
Segment Size field is 2 bytes instead.
Style (UINT32)—This field specifies the style types that
the printer is allowed to perform on the font characters.
31 4 3 0
Reserved Posture
Bit Positions (#) = Posture
1 = Italics
0, 2, 3 = Reserved
Printer-Specific Differences 2-47
Stroke Weight (UINT16)—This field specifies the stroke
weights which the printer is allowed to provide using the
pseudo-bold enhancement algorithm.
15 0
Stroke weight
Bit Position (#) = Stroke Weight
0 = Reserved 8 = “Book” or “Text” Weight
1 = Ultra Thin 9 = Semi-Bold
2 = Extra Thin 10 = Demi-Bold
3 = Thin 11 = Bold
4 = Extra Light 12 = Extra Bold
5 = Light 13 = Black
6 = Demi Light 14 = Extra Black
7 = Semi Light 15 = Ultra Black
Note Only stroke weights greater than the stroke weight of the
font can be provided using the pseudo-bold enhancement
algorithm.
2-48 Printer-Specific Differences
HP LaserJet 4PJ
Programming Tips This section provides programming tips concerning specific
considerations for the HP LaserJet 4PJ printer. This
section covers general print job initialization, font metric
calculation, vertical writing, and other issues which are
pertinent to printing Japanese text on the HP LaserJet 4PJ
printer using PCL 5.
General Print Job Initialization
This example demonstrates the general print job
initialization procedure for the HP LaserJet 4PJ printer,
which is slightly different than that used for other HP
LaserJet printers.
Output from pre-LaserJet 4PJ PCL drivers (for example, a
HP LaserJet 4P driver) will only print correctly on the HP
LaserJet 4PJ printer if the default PCL symbol set is set to
a value other than the Japanese Windows 3.1 (Win3.1J)
symbol set. This is because the default PCL text parsing
method is set based on the default PCL symbol set. When
the default PCL symbol set is set to Win3.1J, the default
text parsing method is Shift-JIS parsing; for any other
value, such as Roman-8, the default text parsing method is
1-byte parsing. To set the default PCL symbol set value, use
PJL or the control panel.
The first example given here is nearly identical to the
initialization used for other HP LaserJet 4 family printers.
The only difference is that it includes a PJL command to set
the default PCL symbol set to Roman-8.
?%-12345X@PJL<CR><LF>
@PJL SET RESOLUTION=600<CR><LF>
@PJL PAGEPROTECT=OFF<CR><LF>
@PJL RET=MEDIUM<CR><LF>
@PJL COMMENT *** This command is added ***
@PJL SET LPARM:PCL SYMSET=ROMAN8<CR><LF>
@PJL ENTER LANGUAGE=PCL<CR><LF>
?E?&l1x1s1h2a0o8c6e54F?&a5L?(0U?(s1p9vs3b41
~01T
The commands in the above example are explained in more
detail in the PCL 5 and PJL technical reference manuals.
Printer-Specific Differences 2-49
The second example given here initializes a PCL 5 print job
for printing Japanese text. The major differences from the
previous example are that it specifies A4 paper, initializes
the text parsing method to Shift-JIS, selects Win3.1J as the
primary symbol set, selects MS-Mincho as the primary font.
?%-12345X@PJL<CR><LF>
@PJL SET RESOLUTION=600<CR><LF>
@PJL PAGEPROTECT=OFF<CR><LF>
@PJL RET=MEDIUM<CR><LF>
@PJL ENTER LANGUAGE=PCL<CR><LF>
?E?&l1x1h26a0o8c6e60F?&a5L?&t31P?(19K
~?(s1p10v0s0b28752T
The last line (2 lines, as shown) in the above example is a
PCL 5 initialization string. This set of commands resets the
printer, specifies 1 copy, specifies the paper tray as a paper
source, chooses A4-size paper, selects portrait orientation,
VMI=8 (6LPI), sets top margin to 6 lines, selects a text
length of 60 lines, a 5-column left margin, Shift-JIS
parsing, WIN3.1J symbol set, and a proportional, 10-point,
upright, text-weight MS-Mincho font.
After the PCL print data, the following commands would be
used to complete the job:
?E?%-12345X
Font Metric Calculation
Accurate character placement relies on the ability to predict
character width and height. As a character’s point size
changes, so does its width and height. (CAP displacement,
the distance the CAP moves for vertically rotated text, is a
full-width calculation.)
In proportionally spaced fonts, character widths also vary
from character to character within the font. Variable
character widths add complexity to maintaining accurate
line widths, page breaks, or WYSIWYG operation. To
support most proportionally spaced fonts, font metrics
must be extracted from the font metric files.
2-50 Printer-Specific Differences
In the MS-Mincho and MS-Gothic fonts provided in the HP
LaserJet 4PJ, font metric calculation is somewhat easier
than for the Latin-based fonts. Width calculations are
easier because all characters of these fonts conform to one
of two different character widths at a particular point size.
The characters are either considered full-width or half-
width. One-byte characters are always half-width and
two-byte characters are always full-width.
Full-width characters occupy the entire EM width at a
particular point size. Half-width characters occupy half of
an EM width. The following equations show how to
calculate the EM width and character widths for a
full-width and a half-width character.
ppem = round (DeviceResolution * PointSize/72)
FullWidthDeltaX = round (ppem * PCLUnits/ DeviceResolution)
HalfWidthDeltaX=round ((ppem/2) * PCLUnits/DeviceResolution)
where:
ppem = EM width in pixels
DeviceResolution = current device resolution in dots per inch
(600 or 300dpi)
PointSize = point size requested
FullWidthDeltaX = character width of full-width character in PCL
Units
HalfWidthDeltaX = character width of half-width character in PCL
Units
PCLUnits = PCL Units
The PCL Unit of measure is explained in more detail in the
PCL 5 Technical Reference Manual. The default PCL Unit
size is 1/300th of an inch, but the Unit of Measure command
can be used to set the PCL Unit size to other values.
Note that HalfWidthDeltaX may not be exactly half of
FullWidthDeltaX because of rounding. For example, if
FullWidthDeltaX = round(99.0) = 99, then the
corresponding HalfWidthDeltaX = round(99.0/2) =
round(49.5) = 50.
Printer-Specific Differences 2-51
Character Enhancements
The HP LaserJet 4PJ printer supports PCL pseudo-bold
and pseudo-italic character enhancements. These
enhancements can be applied to the internal MS-Mincho
and MS-Gothic fonts. They can also be applied to a
TrueType soft font if a suitable “Character Enhancement”
Segment is downloaded with the font header.
The enhancements are selected using PCL font selection
commands. The pseudo-italic enhancement can be selected
using the Style command. The pseudo-bold enhancement
can be selected using the Stroke Weight command. The bold
levels which can be applied to the internal MS-Mincho and
MS-Gothic fonts are Semi Bold, Demi Bold, Bold, and Extra
Bold. For example, to select a 10-point, Extra Bold, Italic,
MS-Mincho font, use the following PCL command:
?(19K?(s1p10v1s4b28752T
In the above command, Italics style (1s) and Extra Bold
weight (4b) are selected. Since there is not an Extra Bold
Italic MS-Mincho font resident in the printer, pseudo-italics
and pseudo-bolding algorithms are applied to characters
printed from the regular MS-Mincho font.
If a soft font is selected using the “Font Selection by ID”
command (e.g. ?(#X ), the font is selected without any
character enhancements applied. To select a soft font by ID
with character enhancements, first select the font by ID,
then select the desired attributes. For example, assume a
soft font is downloaded with ID = 1 and a Character
Enhancement Segment indicating that pseudo-bold and
pseudo-italics character enhancements can be applied. The
following command can be used to select that font with
those enhancements:
?(1X?(s1s3B
Other font effects, such as character shadowing, strike-
through, and gray-shading can be accomplished using the
print model.
2-52 Printer-Specific Differences
Note HP-GL/2 as implemented in HP LaserJet printers has no
mechanism for parsing 2-byte characters. Therefore,
HP-GL/2 character transformations (e.g. SI and SR
commands) cannot be applied to these characters.
Vertical Writing
Vertical writing can be accomplished using the vertical
rotated (“-1”) mode of the Character Text Path command
(?&c-1T). When using a vertical rotated text path
direction, full-width characters are rotated and printed “on
their sides.” All other characters are unaffected and the
CAP is still advanced in the horizontal direction. The “-1”
mode has the effect of transforming a portrait page with
horizontal full-width characters into a landscape page with
vertical full-width characters. This can be combined with
the Print Direction command (?&a#P) to achieve the
desired text orientation (e.g. portrait, landscape, reverse
portrait, or reverse landscape).
An example of horizontal and vertical rotated writing is
shown below. The first line of text is horizontal writing and
the second line is vertical rotated writing. Note that the “~”
character is replaced with a vertical substitute on the
second line. The C program that follows was used to
generate the PCL commands for this example.
Printer-Specific Differences 2-53
#include <stdio.h>
#include <fcntl.h>
#define MONTH "\202P\202P\214\216"
#define DAY1 "\202P\202U\223\372"
#define TILDE "\201\140"
#define DAY2 "\202P\202V\223\372"
#define KANJITXT MONTH DAY1 TILDE MONTH DAY2
FILE *prn;
main()
{
int point_size=24;
prn = fopen("lpt1","wb"); /* open lpt1 for writing */
fprintf(prn,"\33%%-12345X"); /* send UEL to get to PJL */
fprintf(prn,"@PJL ENTER LANGUAGE=PCL\n"); /* Enter PCL */
fprintf(prn,"\33E"); /* send an esc E to reset printer */
fprintf(prn,"\33&a4L"); /* left margin */
fprintf(prn,"\33&t31P"); /* text parsing = Shift-JIS */
fprintf(prn,"\33(19K"); /* symbol set = Win3.1J */
fprintf(prn,"\33(s1p%dv0s0b28752T",point_size); /* MS-Mincho */
fprintf(prn,"\n\n\n\r" KANJITXT); /* print horizontal version */
fprintf(prn,"\33&c-1T"); /* select vertical writing */
fprintf(prn,"\n\n\n\r" KANJITXT); /* print vertical version */
fprintf(prn,"\f"); /* formfeed */
fprintf(prn,"\33%%-12345X"); /* send UEL to get to PJL */
}
Printing Ruby Characters (Furigana)
Ruby characters, also known in Japanese as furigana,
are small characters typically used as an aid in kanji
pronunciation. Ruby characters are usually (but not
always) hiragana. They are generally placed above the
corresponding kanji in horizontal writing and to the right
in vertical writing. Ruby characters can be generated using
font scaling and cursor positioning commands.
An example of ruby characters is shown below. In this
example, the ruby characters are printed at one-third the
size of the kanji. The C program that follows was used to
generate the PCL commands for this example.
2-54 Printer-Specific Differences
#include <stdio.h>
#include <fcntl.h>
#define KANJITXT "\225\127\226\173"
#define RUBYTXT "\202\320\202\345\202\244 \202\331\202\361 "
FILE *prn;
main()
{
int point_size=72;
prn = fopen("lpt1","wb"); /* open lpt1 for writing */
fprintf(prn,"\33%%-12345X"); /* send UEL to get to PJL */
fprintf(prn,"@PJL ENTER LANGUAGE=PCL\n"); /* Enter PCL */
fprintf(prn,"\33E"); /* EscE to reset printer */
fprintf(prn,"\33&t31P"); /* text parsing = Shift-JIS */
fprintf(prn,"\33(19K"); /* symbol set = Win3.1J */
fprintf(prn,"\33(s1p%dv0s0b28752T",point_size); /* MS-Mincho */
fprintf(prn,"\33*p300x400Y"); /* set cursor position */
fprintf(prn,KANJITXT); /* print kanji characters */
fprintf(prn,"\33(s%dV",point_size/3); /*furigana point size */
fprintf(prn,"\33*p300x%dY",400-4*point_size);/*cursor position*/
fprintf(prn,RUBYTXT); /* print ruby characters */
fprintf(prn,"\f"); /* formfeed */
fprintf(prn,"\33%%-12345X"); /* send UEL to get to PJL */
}
Printer-Specific Differences 2-55
Vertical Underlining
In Japanese writing, vertical underlines are placed to the
right of vertical columns of text. This can be accomplished
in PCL 5 using the Fill Rectangular Area command.
An underline is simply a long thin black-filled box. The
length of the underline depends on the length of the text to
be underlined.
An example of vertical underlining is shown below. The C
program that follows was used to generate the PCL
commands for this example.
2-56 Printer-Specific Differences
#include <stdio.h>
#include <fcntl.h>
#define MONTH "\202P\202P\214\216"
#define DAY1 "\202P\202U\223\372"
#define TILDE "\201\140"
#define DAY2 "\202P\202V\223\372"
#define KANJITXT MONTH DAY1 TILDE MONTH DAY2
FILE *prn;
main()
{
int point_size=24;
prn = fopen("lpt1","wb"); /* open lpt1 for writing */
fprintf(prn,"\33%%-12345X"); /* send UEL to get to PJL */
fprintf(prn,"@PJL ENTER LANGUAGE=PCL\n"); /* Enter PCL */
fprintf(prn,"\33E"); /* Esc E to reset printer */
fprintf(prn,"\33&t31P"); /* text parsing = Shift-JIS */
fprintf(prn,"\33(19K"); /* symbol set = Win3.1J */
fprintf(prn,"\33&a270P"); /* print direction = 270 */
fprintf(prn,"\33*p500x1300Y"); /* set CAP position */
fprintf(prn,"\33(s1p%dv0s0b28752T",point_size); /* MS-Mincho */
fprintf(prn,"\33&c-1T"); /* select vertical writing */
fprintf(prn, KANJITXT); /* print vertical text */
fprintf(prn,"\33*p500x%dY",1300-point_size*4); /* set CAP for
underline*/
/* draw underline */
fprintf(prn,"\33*c%da3b0P",300 * strlen(KANJITXT)/2 *
point_size/72);
fprintf(prn,"\f"); /* formfeed */
fprintf(prn,"\33%%-12345X"); /* send UEL to get to PJL */
}
Printer-Specific Differences 2-57
Vertical Clusters
Vertical clusters are groups of two or three narrow
characters side-by-side in a vertical line of text. Vertical
clusters containing half-width characters can be created
by using a combination of print direction and cursor
positioning commands.
An example of vertical clusters is shown below. The C
program that follows was used to generate the PCL
commands for this example. In this example, two half-
width characters (e.g. 2-digit numbers) were printed as
vertical clusters.
2-58 Printer-Specific Differences
#include <stdio.h>
#include <fcntl.h>
#define MONTH "\214\216"
#define TILDE "\201\140"
#define DAY "\223\372"
#define CLUSTER "\201\100\033&f0S\033&a0P%s%d\033&a270P\033&f1S"
FILE *prn;
main()
{
int point_size=24;
int offset;
char OFFSET[40];
prn = fopen("lpt1","wb"); /* open lpt1 for writing */
offset = ( 36 * point_size * 300) /
/* ---- ---------- */
( 256 * 72 );
sprintf(OFFSET,"\33*p-%dx-%dY",offset,offset); /* used to
place cluster */
fprintf(prn,"\33%%-12345X"); /* send UEL to get to PJL */
fprintf(prn,"@PJL ENTER LANGUAGE=PCL\n"); /* Enter PCL */
fprintf(prn,"\33E"); /* Esc E to reset printer */
fprintf(prn,"\33&t31P"); /* text parsing = Shift-JIS */
fprintf(prn,"\33(19K"); /* symbol set = Win3.1J */
fprintf(prn,"\33&a270P"); /* print direction = 270 */
fprintf(prn,"\33*p500x1300Y"); /* set CAP position */
fprintf(prn,"\33(s1p%dv0s0b28752T",point_size); /* MS-Mincho */
fprintf(prn,"\33&c-1T"); /* select vertical writing mode */
fprintf(prn, CLUSTER MONTH, OFFSET, 11); /* print month */
fprintf(prn, CLUSTER DAY, OFFSET, 16); /* print day */
fprintf(prn, TILDE); /* print tilde */
fprintf(prn, CLUSTER MONTH, OFFSET, 11); /* print month */
fprintf(prn, CLUSTER DAY, OFFSET, 17); /* print day */
fprintf(prn,"\f"); /* formfeed */
fprintf(prn,"\33%%-12345X"); /* send UEL to get to PJL */
}
Printer-Specific Differences 2-59
Paper Size Three new paper sizes were added to the HP LaserJet 4PJ
printer. These paper sizes include: JIS B5, Hagaki, and
Oufuku-hagaki. The logical page size in dots per inch are
shown in the table below. See page 1-26 in this manual and
pages 2-9 to 2-10 in the PCL 5 Printer Language Technical
Reference Manual for an explanation of these values.
DIMENSIONS
(at 300 DPI - double for 600 DPI)
PAPER SIZEABCDEFGH
Portrait Dimensions
JIS B5 2149 3035 2007 3035 71 0 50 150
Hagaki 1181 1748 1039 1748 71 0 50 150
Oufuku-hagaki 1748 2362 1606 2362 71 0 50 150
Landscape Dimensions
JIS B5 3035 2149 2917 2149 59 0 50 150
Hagaki 1748 1181 1630 1181 59 0 50 150
Oufuku-hagaki 2362 1748 2244 1748 59 0 50 150
HP LaserJet 4 Plus
and 4M Plus
Printers
HP LaserJet 4 Plus and 4M Plus printers are
performance-enhanced follow-on products for HP LaserJet 4
and 4M printers, respectively. The HP LaserJet 4M Plus
printer is the multi-platform (PostScript) version of the
LaserJet 4 Plus printer.
In addition to extra speed, these printers also have the
following added features which are not controlled using
PCL:
Memory Enhancement technology (MEt), which uses
memory-saving techniques to better utilize available
memory (refer to Chapter 5 “Memory Usage” for
additional information). MEt is not controlled using PCL.
Resource saving, as in the LaserJet 4Si printer. Resource
saving allows saving information for the current
language (PCL or PostScript) when switching to another
2-60 Printer-Specific Differences
language. If resource saving is enabled, all the
permanent fonts, macros, and user-defined patterns plus
other miscellaneous data is saved in a reserved portion of
printer memory. This data is stored until the language is
enabled again. When the language is re-enabled, the
stored data is made available for use. Resource saving is
enabled from the control panel or using PJL—no PCL
commands are required for this operation.
EconoMode, a feature supported by HP LaserJet 4L and
4P printers, allows the user to reduce the amount of
toner used by removing about 75% of the dots from the
printed page. EconoMode is selected using PJL or from
the control panel—it is not controlled using PCL.
Powersave mode, which minimizes power consumption
when the printer is sitting idle. The amount of idle time
required before the printer goes into powersave mode is
configurable using the control panel or PJL.
PCL operation in these two printers is almost identical to
that of HP LaserJet 4 and 4M printers, except HP LaserJet
4 Plus and 4M Plus printers support Logical Operations
(ROP3) as explained in the HP LaserJet 4ML printer
section in this chapter. In addition, the internal fonts in
HP LaserJet Plus and 4M Plus printers support the Latin 2
and Latin 5 symbol sets for all typefaces (in the HP
LaserJet 4, 4M, 4Si, and 4SiMx, only 15 of the 35 Intellifont
typefaces support these symbol sets). Refer to Table 1-1,
PCL Feature Support Matrix, for the commands these
printers support and to Chapter 3, “Internal
Typefaces/Fonts and Symbol Sets,” for font support
information.
Printer-Specific Differences 2-61
HP LaserJet 4V
and 4MV Printers HP LaserJet 4V and 4MV printers print at speeds up to 16
pages per minute and handle many paper sizes including
11"x17" paper. The HP LaserJet 4MV is the multi-platform
(PostScript) version of the HP LaserJet 4V printer.
The HP LaserJet 4V/4MV PCL 5 feature set is similar to
that of the HP LaserJet 4 Plus/4M Plus printers, with the
addition of wide format media support. As an option, the
printer can also support Japanese printing as does the HP
LaserJet 4PJ printer, including the following PCL
enhancements:
Font header support for large bitmap fonts
Text parsing method
Character text path direction
Japanese media/postcard support
Japanese fonts (large fonts)
As with HP LaserJet 4Plus and 4M Plus printers, the
LaserJet 4V and 4MV printers support the following added
features which are not controlled using PCL:
Memory Enhancement technology (MEt)
Resource saving
EconoMode
Powersave mode
Refer to Table 1-1, the PCL Feature Support Matrix, for
the commands these printers support, and to Chapter 3,
“Internal Typefaces/Fonts and Symbol Sets,” for font
support information.
2-62 Printer-Specific Differences
Font Header
Format 16 Bitmap
Font Support
Font Header Format 16 was introduced with the HP
LaserJet 4PJ for downloading large TrueType fonts. For the
HP LaserJet 4V, Font Header Format 16 has been extended
to support large bitmap fonts as well. The Font Header
command ( ? ) s # W [font header data] ) is used to
download font header data to the printer.
A large font is a bound font with character codes that are
not limited to 8-bit values. For this reason a large font is
sometimes called a 16-bit font.
Font Header Format Font Header Format 16 was introduced because some font
data segments in large fonts could be larger than 65535
bytes, and this was not supported by Font Header Form
at 15. The structures of Format 15 and Format 16 are
identical with the exception of the Segment Size field in the
Segmented Font Data format. Table 2-10 below shows the
Format 15 and Format 16 Font Header format. Table 2-11
shows the Format 15 Segmented Font Data format. Table
2-12 shows the Format 16 Segmented Font Data format.
Note that Format 15 does not support bitmap fonts.
Printer-Specific Differences 2-63
Table 2-10. Format 15 and Format 16 Font Header
Byte 15 (MSB) 8 7 (LSB) 0
0 Font Descriptor Size (minimum 72)
2 Header Format (15 or 16) Font Type
4 Style MSB Reserved
6 Baseline Position
8 Cell Width
10 Cell Height
12 Orientation Spacing
14 Symbol Set
16 Pitch (default HMI)
18 Height
20 x-Height
22 Width Type Style LSB
24 Stroke Weight Typeface LSB
26 Typeface MSB Serif Style
28 Quality Placement
30 Underline Position (Distance) Underline Thickness
32 Text Height
34 Text Width
36 First Code
38 Last Code/Number of Characters
40 Pitch Extended Height Extended
42 Cap Height
44 - 47 Font Number
48 - 63 Font Name
64 Scale Factor
66 Master Underline Position
68 Master Underline Thickness
70 Font Scaling Technology Variety
72
. . . [additional data may be inserted here]
Desc.
Size
. . .
Segmented Font Data
. . .
# - 2 Reserved (0) Checksum
2-64 Printer-Specific Differences
Table 2-11. Format 15 Segmented Font Data
Byte 15 (MSB) 8 7 (LSB) 0
x + 0 First segment, Segment Identifier
x + 2 First segment, Segment Size
x + 4
. . . First segment, Data Segment
. . .
x + 4
+ 1st
seg size
Second segment: Segment identifier,
Size, Data Segment
. . .
. . . . . .
# - 6 Null Segment Identifier (FFFF - hex)
# - 4 Null Segment Size (0)
# - 2 Reserved (0) Checksum
x = Font Descriptor Size
# = Font header length (as defined in the Font Header command).
Table 2-12. Format 16 Segmented Font Data
Byte 15 (MSB) 8 7 (LSB) 0
x + 0 First segment, Segment Identifier
x + 2
x + 4 First segment, Segment Size
x + 6
. . . First segment, Data Segment
. . .
x + 6
+ 1st
seg size
Second segment: Segment identifier, Size, Data Segment
. . .
. . . . . .
# - 8 Null Segment Identifier (FFFF - hex)
# - 6
# - 4 Null Segment Size (0)
# - 2 Reserved (0) Checksum
x = Font Descriptor Size
# = Font header length (as defined in Font Header command).
Printer-Specific Differences 2-65
The Segment Size field, which is part of each segment
within the Segmented Font Data, was changed from an
unsigned integer in Format 15 to an unsigned long integer
in Format 16. This allows segments to be up to 232– 1 bytes
long.
Font Header Format 15 is described in more detail in the
PCL 5 Printer Language Technical Reference Manual in the
“Soft Font Creation” chapter.
Format 16 supports new segments and new values for the
Font Type and Font Scaling Technology fields. New
segments which are specific to large TrueType fonts are
described in this chapter in the section titled “HP LaserJet
4PJ printer.” (This information will included be in future
versions of the PCL 5 Printer Language Technical Reference
Manual.) The new segments and values which are specific
to bitmap fonts are described below.
Header Format
The Header Format byte identifies the font header format.
For large fonts, this field should be set to 16. Note that
Format 15 does not support bitmap fonts.
Scale Factor
For bitmap fonts, set this field to 0.
Master Underline Position
For bitmap fonts, set this field to 0.
Master Underline Thickness
For bitmap fonts, set this field to 0.
Font Scaling Technology
For bitmap fonts, set this field to 254.
Variety
For bitmap fonts, set this field to 0.
2-66 Printer-Specific Differences
The remaining fields should be set the same as in the
Format 0 Font Header for PCL Bitmapped Fonts, with the
following exceptions:
Font Type
Font type describes the font’s relation to symbol sets. For
Format 16 bitmap fonts, set this field to 3. A value of 3 is
used to identify a large (16-bit) font. All character codes 0 to
65534 are printable, except 0, 7 to 15, and 27 [decimal].
Access to those codes which are unprintable, yet have a
character defined, requires the use of the Transparent Print
Data command. In older font header formats, PCL 5
LaserJet printers use this field to determine the first and
last codes of the symbol set.
First Code
For Format 16 bitmap fonts, set this field to the first
printable character in the font. In older bitmap font
formats, PCL 5 LaserJet printers ignore this field.
Last Code
For Format 16 bitmap fonts, set this field to the last
printable character in the font. In older bitmap font
formats, PCL 5 LaserJet printers ignore this field.
One new data segment is defined for Format 16 bitmap
fonts:
Bitmap Resolution Data Segment
The bitmap resolution data segment is used to define the
x-resolution and y-resolution for the bitmap. This segment
is required for Format 16 bitmap fonts.
The structure for the bitmap segment is shown in
Table 2-13.
Printer-Specific Differences 2-67
Table 2-13. Bitmap Resolution Data Segment
Byte 15 (MSB) 8 7 (LSB) 0
x + 0 Segment Identifier (’BR’)
x + 2
x + 4 Segment Size (4)
x + 6 X Resolution
x + 8 Y Resolution
The decimal equivalent for the ’BR’ mneumonic is 16978.
X Resolution (unsigned long integer)
This fields specifies the resolution of the font in the X
dimension in dots per inch.
Y Resolution (unsigned long integer)
This fields specifies the resolution of the font in the Y
dimension in dots per inch.
If the specified combination is not supported by the printer,
the font will be invalidated. In the HP LaserJet 4V,
supported combinations are (X Resolution=300,Y
Resolution=300) and (X Resolution=600,Y Resolution=600).
Character Definition The Character Descriptor and Data command
( ?( s # W [character descriptor and data] ) is used to
download character data blocks to the printer. Format 4 is
used to download character descriptors and data for bitmap
characters. This command is described in detail in the PCL
5 Printer Language Technical Reference Manual.
2-68 Printer-Specific Differences
Limitations The following limitations apply to Format 16 Font Headers
for bitmap fonts:
The Font Type field for Format 16 bitmap fonts must be
set to 3. This is the case for 1-byte as well as 2-byte
bitmap fonts. First Code and Last Code fields need to be
set.
Format 16 optional data segments are ignored for bitmap
fonts. These include the galley character segment,
vertical substitution character segment, typeface string
segment, and vertical rotation segment.
Vertical rotated printing (character text path direction
command, ?&c-1T) is not available for bitmap fonts.
Printer-Specific Differences 2-69
HP Color LaserJet
Printer As its name implies, the HP Color LaserJet printer is a
color laser printer. This 300 dpi printer adds several new
features to the PCL 5 language. These new features are
summarized in the table below and are described in detail
in the PCL 5 Color Technical Reference Manual (part
number 5961-0940). The printer also supports logical
operations, the HP-GL/2 Merge Control command, and
pixel placement (both PCL and HP-GL/2 commands). These
commands are described in the HP LaserJet 4L section of
this chapter and also in the PCL 5 Color Technical
Reference Manual.
Feature Status Comments
AppleTalk Configuration
Modified In addition to supporting the RENAME, JOB, and TYPE
key values, this printer also supports the ZONE value.
Assign Color Index
New Assigns the three current color components to the specified
palette index number.
Color Components 1, 2, 3
New These three commands specify the three color components of
any new color entry in the color palette.
Color lookup Tables
New Enables and specifies color lookup tables to map color input
data into a new output range based on point-by-point
conversions. A lookup table is specified for each primary
color.
CR (Color Range—HP-GL/2)
New Sets the range for specifying relative color data.
Configure Image Data
New Configures the printer for color imaging—establishes a
modifiable color palette, sets the pixel encoding mode, and
sets the number of bits per index and per primary color.
Download Dither Matrix
New Specifies a single dither matrix for all three primary colors.
Download Pattern
New Downloads user-defined patterns, including color patterns,
to the printer.
Foreground Color
New Sets the foreground color to the specified index of the
current palette.
Gamma Correction
New Specifies the gamma correction to be applied equally to each
primary color.
Monochrome Print Mode
New Provides a means to convert a color page to a quick-printing
gray-scale equivalent.
NP (Number of Pens—HP-GL/2)
New Resizes the palette after the IN or ?*v#W commands.
Palette Control
New Provides a mechanism for marking and deleting palettes.
Palette Control ID
New Identifies a palette to be used for some of the palette control
functions.
Table 2-14. PCL Feature Additions for HP Color LaserJet Printer
2-70 Printer-Specific Differences
AppleTalk
Configuration
Command
As discussed in the HP LaserJet 4 section of this chapter,
the AppleTalk Configuration command allows a user to
send PCL jobs to the printer over AppleTalk. In addition to
the key values previously discussed (RENAME, TYPE, and
JOB), the HP Color LaserJet printer also supports the
ZONE key value as follows.
ZONE
ZONE changes the zone field of the printer’s AppleTalk
Network Identifier (Name Binding Protocol type field).
?&b#WZONE<sp>zonename
Valid characters for the zone name include 0-255 except for
characters $00, “@” ($40), “:” ($3A), “*” ($2A), “=” ($3D),
$C5, and ($FF). The zone name must contain at least one
character, and only the first 31 characters are used. If the
zone is invalid, then the printer’s zone is not changed. Zone
changes only occur after the present job has completed.
Feature Status Comments
PC (Pen Color—HP-GL/2)
New Changes the pen color in a palette created by the IN or CID
command (?*v#W).
Push/Pop Palette
New Pushes or pops the palette from the palette stack.
Raster Scaling
New/Modified Several commands are added for raster scaling: Destination
Raster Width (?*t#H), Destination Raster Height (?*t#V);
also, two parameters are added to the Start Raster Graphics
command to initiate scaling (?*r2A and ?*r3A). (See the PCL
5 Color Technical Reference Manual for more information.)
Render Algorithm
New Selects the algorithm to be used for rendering page marking
entities on a given page.
Select Palette by ID
New Activates a palette with the specified ID number.
Set Viewing Illuminant
New Specifies the relative white point used in the determination of
a viewing illuminant condition.
Simple Color
New Specifies an unmodifiable fixed-size palette.
Transfer Raster Graphics (by
plane)
New Provides a means to send raster data by color plane. This
command sends a plane of raster data to the printer and
advances to the next plane.
Table 2-14. PCL Feature Additions for HP Color LaserJet Printer (continued)
Printer-Specific Differences 2-71
HP LaserJet 4LJ
Pro Printer The HP LaserJet 4LJ Pro printer (C3935), released in May
1995, is designed primarily for the Japanese market. This
printer provides a print resolution of 600 dpi, has a
maximum print speed of 4ppm, 2Mb of internal base
memory, and improved font cache algorithm. PCL operation
for this printer is identical to that of the HP LaserJet 4PJ
printer. For command support, refer to Table 1-1, PCL
Feature Support Matrix and to the “HP LaserJet 4PJ
Printer” section earlier in this chapter.
The HP LaserJet 4LJ Pro printer contains the same two
Japanese typefaces, MS Mincho and MS Gothic (and
WIN3.1J symbol set), as those in the HP LaserJet 4PJ
printer. (The HP LaserJet 4PJ and the 4LJ Pro printers
have a reduced set of Intellifont fonts from that of the
standard HP LaserJet 4 printer family.) For detailed font
information refer to Chapter 3.
HP LaserJet 4LC
Printer The HP LaserJet 4LC printer (C3932), released in March
1995, is designed primarily for the Chinese market. This
printer provides a print resolution of 600 dpi, has a
maximum print speed of 4 ppm, 2Mb of internal base
memory, and improved font cache algorithm. PCL operation
for this printer is identical to that of the LaserJet 4PJ
printer. For specific PCL command support information,
refer to Table 1-1, PCL Feature Support Matrix.
The HP LaserJet 4LC printer contains three new Chinese
typefaces, SimSun, SimHei, and GW-Kai (and a new symbol
set for these fonts, GB2312). The default typeface is
SimSun and the default symbol set is GB2312. (The
HP LaserJet 4LC printer contains the standard set of
Intellifont fonts, unlike the HP LaserJet 4PJ and 4LJ Pro
printers which have reduced Intellifont typeface sets.)
Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed font information.
The typeface/font information, described in the “HP
LaserJet 4PJ Printer” section earlier in this chapter for the
2-72 Printer-Specific Differences
Japanese typefaces, also applies to the LaserJet 4LC
printer’s Chinese typefaces with the following differences.
The default values for the Text Parsing Method command
are different for the HP LaserJet 4LC. These default values
are 0 or 38 (provided the default symbol set is GB2312,
otherwise it is 0). Also, the examples in this section can be
used for the Chinese fonts, provided the symbol set value
field in the Symbol Set command is changed to 18C (for the
GB2312 symbol set) and the typeface value in the font
selection command string is changed to one of the Chinese
fonts [for example, the Japanese font selection command
?(19K?(s1p10v1s4b2852T should be changed to
?(18C?(s1p10v1s4b37058T ].
HP LaserJet 5P
and 5MP Printers The HP LaserJet 5P and 5MP printers were released March
6, 1995. These printers are similar to the HP LaserJet 4P
printer except that they are designed to run faster, have an
MP paper tray in place of the manual feed slot, and have a
reduced control panel similar to the HP LaserJet 4L
printer. The HP LaserJet 5P / 5MP printer’s maximum
print speed is 6 pages per minute (HP LaserJet 4P runs at
4 ppm) and has a print resolution of 600 dpi.
Another new feature on this printer is an IrDA-compliant
infrared serial I/O port located on the front of the printer.
PCL operation is almost identical to that of the HP
LaserJet 4 Plus printer. (Refer to Table 1-1, HP LaserJet
Printer Feature Comparison, for the specific PCL
implementation.)
Printer-Specific Differences 2-73
HP LaserJet 5L
Printer The HP LaserJet 5L printer, introduced in September 1995,
is much different in appearance than the LaserJet 4L
printer, but it has a very similar feature set, including the
same set of 26 internal typefaces. One of the main
differences is that the LaserJet 5L printer offers 600 dpi
printing. Although both printers have a print engine speed
of 4 pages per minute, the LaserJet 5L printer has faster
processing which increases performance. As the LaserJet
4L printer, the printer has a reduced-function control panel.
The HP LaserJet 5L printer has a vertical design and
supports all paper sizes supported by the LaserJet 4L
printer. In addition, the “custom” paper size is supported
through the printer driver.
The default symbol set is PC-8 instead of Roman-8.
Manual feed operation is slightly different for the HP
LaserJet 5L printer. When manual feed is selected, the
printer pauses and waits for the user to insert the correct
media into the printer (either in the paper input bin or the
single sheet input slot) and press the control panel key.
PCL and PJL operation is almost identical to that of the HP
LaserJet 4L printer. Two differences are that the LaserJet
5L printer adds support for the logical operations and pixel
placement commands. These features are described in this
chapter in the LaserJet 4ML section. (Refer to Table 1-1,
HP LaserJet Printer Feature Comparison, for the specific
PCL implementation.)
2-74 Printer-Specific Differences
HP LaserJet 5Si
and 5SiMx Printers HP LaserJet 5Si and 5SiMx printers are designed for using
in shared printing environments. The HP LaserJet 5SiMx
printer is equivalent to the HP LaserJet 5Si printer, but
also includes PostScript Level 2, 8 Mb of additional
memory, and the HP JetDirect network interface card.
HP LaserJet 5Si and 5SiMx printers have features similar
to those of HP LaserJet 4Si and 4SiMx printers, with
improved performance and extra paper handling features.
Some of the feature differences are listed below.
The printers include the same set of internal fonts, but
there are no font cartridge slots on the printers. Both
printers support font/macro SIMMs and downloaded soft
fonts and macros.
The default symbol set is PC-8 instead of Roman-8.
Additional paper and envelope sizes are supported,
including ledger (11" x 17"). Executive size paper is only
supported by the MP tray.
There is no job offset mechanism in the printers.
HP LaserJet 5Si and 5SiMx printers do not request
the envelope size every time the power is cycled. It is
assumed that the size does not usually change between
power down and power up.
Base HP LaserJet 5Si and 5SiMx printers have one
100-sheet multi-purpose tray (Tray 1), and two 500-sheet
universal-input trays. Optional paper handling devices
include a duplex unit, a power envelope feeder, a
2000-sheet input tray and a multi-bin mailbox.
HP LaserJet 4Si and 4SiMx printers used “tray locking”
to prevent automatic selection of a paper tray. HP
LaserJet 5Si and 5SiMx printers accomplish “tray
locking” using the Alphanumeric ID command to select
the paper tray by media type.
Table 2-15 lists the PCL feature additions for HP LaserJet
5Si and 5SiMx printers.
Printer-Specific Differences 2-75
Descriptions of the Paper (Media) Source, Output Bin, and
Alphanumeric ID commands are provided below.
Paper (Media) Source
Command The Paper (Media) Source command selects the specified
input media source. Parameters have been added to enable
printing from the LaserJet 5Si/5SiMx printer trays.
?&l#H
# = 0 - Print current page (source is unchanged)
1 - Tray 2 (upper drawer)
2 - Manual feed (tray 1, right side tray)
3 - Manual envelope feed (tray 1, right tray)
4 - Tray 3 (lower drawer)
5 - High Capacity Input (HCI), first tray
6 - Optional envelope feeder
7 - Autoselect
8 - Tray 1 (right side tray)
20 - 39 - High Capacity Input (HCI) trays 2- 21
Default = 7
Range = 0 to 8, 20 - 39
Feature Status Comments
Paper (Media) Source
Modified Additional parameters have been added to provide support
for Tray 1, the printer’s right side multi-purpose tray and
the other optional trays (see the description of this
command in the following paragraphs).
Output Bin
Modified The Output Bin command (?&l#G) selects the destination
bin for the print job.
Alphanumeric ID
New Specifies alphanumeric String IDs for selecting and
manipulating fonts, macros, and media types. Specifies
media selection by the type of media and supports
enhancements for the printer disk drive.
Table 2-15. PCL Feature Additions for HP LaserJet 5Si/5SiMx Printers
2-76 Printer-Specific Differences
The following table compares the paper/media source
values and the trays they select on various printers.
Value (#) LaserJet 4,
4 Plus, 4V LaserJet
4Si/4SiMx LaserJet 5Si/
5SiMx
1 PC Tray Upper
Cassette Tray 2
(upper drawer)
2, 3
(manual
feed)
MP Tray Manual
Feed Slot Tray 1
(right side,
manual feed)
4MP Tray
as
Cassette
Lower
Cassette Tray 3
(lower drawer)
5 LC Tray First Tray of HCI
8 N/A N/A Tray 1
(right side,
normal)
Printer-Specific Differences 2-77
Output Bin Command This command selects the destination bin into which the
print job is output when printed.
?&l#G
# = 0 - Automatic selection
1 - Selects bin #1 (printer top/face-down bin)
2 - Selects bin #2 (printer left/face-up bin; this
bin not available when the High Capacity
Output (HCO) is attached)
3 - Selects bin #3 (HCO face up bin)
4 - Selects bin #4 (HCO #1 face down bin)
5 - Selects bin #5 (HCO #2 face down bin)
6 - Selects bin #6 (HCO #3 face down bin)
7 - Selects bin #7 (HCO #4 face down bin)
8 - Selects bin #8 (HCO #5 face down bin)
9 - Selects bin #9 (HCO #6 face down bin)
10 - Selects bin #10 (HCO #7 face down bin)
11 - Selects bin #11 (HCO #8 face down bin)
Default = 0
Range = 0 to 11
Note The Output Bin command is not recommended. Instead, it
is preferred that the PJL OUTBIN command be used to set
the default media destination.
2-78 Printer-Specific Differences
Alphanumeric ID
Command The Alphanumeric ID command performs several different
functions depending on the operation specified. This
command:
Specifies the type of print media on which to print a job
(rather than specifying its location)
Specifies an ID string for different PCL objects (fonts and
macros)
Supports the mass storage PCL enhancements for the
LaserJet 5Si/5SiMx printer disk (allowing, for example,
downloading a font with a String ID to RAM— download-
ing to the printer disk must be done using PJL)
The format of the Alphanumeric ID command is as follows:
?&n#W[Operation][String ID]
# = Number of bytes of String ID data
Default = 0
Range = 2 to 512
The value field (#) identifies the number of bytes in the
String ID.
The Operation byte determines the type of operation and
the type of object on which the operation is to be performed.
The operations are listed in the table below.
The String ID begins with the second byte and can be up to
511 characters long.
Printer-Specific Differences 2-79
Operation Description
0Sets the current Font ID to the given String ID. This operation allows
the user to set the current PCL Font ID to a string name, which gives the
user the ability to download fonts to a string name. If the current Font ID
has been set with both the Alphanumeric ID command and the Font ID
command (?*c#D), the ID last sent takes precedence. For example, if the
current font ID was set to 10 and then to “Font1”, the current font ID would
be “Font1”.
1Associates the current Font ID to the font with the String ID
supplied. This operation finds the font with the supplied String ID and
assigns the current Font ID to that font so that the font now has two names.
The original font name is used to perform font management commands on
the font, and the new associated name is used when selecting the font for
usage. Note that since fonts with string names can be associated to numeric
Font IDs, these fonts are selectable in HP-GL/2 using the numeric Font ID.
2Selects the font referred to by the String ID as primary. This operation
finds the associated font using the supplied String ID and specifies that font
as the current primary font. The command is ignored if there is no font with
that String ID.
3Selects the font referred to by the String ID as secondary. This
operation functions the same as the primary font specification (operation
number 2), however this command specifies the font as secondary.
4Sets the current Macro ID to the String ID. This operation allows the
user to set the current PCL Macro ID to a String ID name. If the current
Macro ID has been set with both the Alphanumeric ID command and the
Macro ID command (?&f#Y), the ID last sent takes precedence. For example,
if the current Macro ID was set to 10 and then to “Macro1”, the current
macro ID would be “Macro1”.
5Associates the current Macro ID to the supplied String ID. This
operation finds the macro with the supplied String ID and assigns the
current Macro ID to that macro. This macro then has two names. The
original Macro ID name is used to perform macro management commands on
the macro, and the new associated name is used when executing, calling, or
overlaying the macro.
20 Deletes the font association named by the current Font ID. The font
must have been associated with an alphanumeric Font ID (using operation 0).
No String ID is supplied (?&n1W20). This command removes the alphanumeric
font name association, however the disk resource itself is not changed.
2-80 Printer-Specific Differences
Operation Description
21 Deletes the macro association named by the current Macro ID. The
macro must have been associated with an alphanumeric Macro ID (using
operation 4). No String ID is supplied (?&n1W21). This command removes
the alphanumeric macro name association, however the disk resource itself is
not changed.
100 Media select (see media selection table). Media types are specified using
the printer control panel. The following table indicates which media type and
paper size is used in the various media-select situations.
Note PCL objects stored on the printer disk cannot be deleted,
set to temporary, set to permanent, or modified in any way
using the PCL language.
Printer-Specific Differences 2-81
Media Type Paper Size Paper Source Size/Type Used
Not specified Not specified Not specified Default size
Default type
Not specified Not specified Specified
(not manual feed) Default size
Type configured in specified tray
Not specified Not specified Specified
(manual feed) Manual feed request
Default size
Not specified Specified Not specified Specified size
Default type
Not specified Specified Specified
(not manual feed) Specified size
Type configured in specified tray
Not specified Specified Specified
(manual feed) Manual feed request
Specified size
Specified Not specified Not specified Default size
Specified type
Specified Not specified Specified
(not manual feed) Default size
Specified type
Specified Not specified Specified
(manual feed) Manual feed request
Default size
Specified type
Specified Specified Not specified Specified size
Specified type
Specified Specified Specified
(not manual feed) Specified size
Specified type
Specified Specified Specified
(manual feed) Manual feed request
Specified size
Specified type
A paper source is considered to be not specified when a
Media Source command has not been received or when the
media source is set to autoselect (value 7). The media type
is considered to be not specified when an Alphanumeric ID
command for media type (value 100) has not been received.
Selecting the default media type causes the printer to
consider the media type as not specified.
Selecting an undefined or unavailable ID causes the printer
to generate a manual feed request.
2-82 Printer-Specific Differences
Example: Using the Alphanumeric ID Command to
Download a Font
Fonts can be downloaded to the printer disk using PJL, or
using PCL you can download a font with a String ID to
RAM. The following example demonstrates downloading a
font to a string name using PCL.
Set the alphanumeric font ID to “TTFont1”
?&n8W0TTFont1
Download the font. It is assigned the String ID “TTFont1”
?sW[data]
Example: Using a Font with a String ID
When the user wants to use a font with a String ID, the
user must first associate that font with a new Font ID
number. This association is required so that whether the
font is on disk or RAM, the procedure is the same.
Set the current Font ID to “AssociatedFontID”
?&n17W0AssociatedFontID
Find the font with ID “UnivRomanID” on disk or in RAM
and give it the associated ID of “AssociatedFontID”
?&n12W1UnivRomanID
Set the current Font ID to 10
?*c10D
Find the font with String ID “TimesRmID” on disk or in
RAM and give it the associated Font ID of 10
?&n10W1TimesRmID
Set the current secondary font to the font with a Font ID of
10 (which in this case, is an associated font)
?)10X
Printer-Specific Differences 2-83
Specify the current font as primary using the alphanumeric
ID command
?&n17W2AssociatedFontID
Delete the name “AssociatedFontID” from the PCL database
?&n17W0AssociatedFontID
?&n1W20
Reset the printer. Resetting deletes all font and macro
associations.
?E
2-84 Printer-Specific Differences
HP DeskJet 1200C
Printer The DeskJet 1200C is a 300-dpi LaserJet-compatible
thermal inkjet color printer. It uses PCL 5 and is very
compatible with the LaserJet 4 family of printers. The main
differences between the DeskJet 1200C and the LaserJet 4
printer are summarized in the table below (for a complete
listing, see Table 1-1).
The DeskJet 1200C printer does not support the following
LaserJet 4 features:
Unit of Measure (?&u#D)
Status Readback (?*s#X, ?*s#U, ?*s#M, ?*s#T, ?*s#I)
Raster resolutions of 200 dpi and 600 dpi
Page sizes: Executive, A4, JIS B5 paper, International B5
envelope, Monarch envelope
HP-GL/2 in macros
Feature Status Comments
Enter HP-GL/2 Mode
Modified Three additional parameters (-1, 2, 3) have been added to
provide support for Standalone HP-GL/2 Mode (?%-1B), for
using the current PCL coordinate system/previous HP-GL/2
pen position (?%2B), and for using the current PCL
coordinate system/current PCL CAP (?%3B).
Media Type
New Sets the print mode required for printing on various media
types.
Mechanical Print Quality
New Determines the graphics print quality.
Negative Motion
New Specifies whether negative motion will be used.
Raster Scaling
New/Modified Several commands are added for raster scaling: Destination
Raster Width (?*t#H), Destination Raster Height (?*t#V),
Scale Algorithm (?*t#K); also, two parameters are added to
the Start Raster Graphics command to initiate scaling
(?*r2A and ?*r3A). (See the PCL 5 Color Technical
Reference Manual for more information.)
Color Commands
New See Table 1-1 for a complete list of color commands
supported by the printer. See the PCL 5 Color Technical
Reference Manual for descriptions of the color commands.
Table 2-16. PCL Feature Additions for HP DeskJet 1200C Printer
Printer-Specific Differences 2-85
Updated Features Printers with a “B” or “C” revision code, indicated by the
third digit in the serial number, have the following
additional new features. (Print the self-test to see the serial
number.)
Two-Byte Fonts. Provides support for two-byte (large)
fonts with more than 256 characters. Two-byte fonts
support such large symbol set mappings as Unicode,
Shift-JIS, JIS208, and Big5. Two-byte fonts are
compatible with current PCL data structures.
Frame Buffer/MEt Architecture. Provides MEt
(Memory Enhancement technology), which overcomes
memory contention problems. Drivers can use the PJL
SET command (@PJL SET PAGEPROTECT=LETTER/
LEGAL/ A4/OFF) to put the printer into a page protect
mode that reserves the memory equivalent of a complete
full-color frame buffer for the current page size. Page
protect mode reserves printer memory blocks large
enough to represent cyan, magenta, and yellow (CMY)
bitmaps for an entire page of the currently selected
media).
Noise Dither. Two new halftone render algorithms
(noise dither and monochrome noise dither) have been
added.
Arbitrary Dither Matrix Sizes. The printer now
allows the full 16-bit range for downloaded dither matrix
height and width (?*m#W).
2-86 Printer-Specific Differences
Enter HP-GL/2 Mode
Command The Enter HP-GL/2 Mode command causes the printer
to interpret data as HP-GL/2 commands instead of PCL
commands. Three new parameters are added: one enables
stand-alone plotter mode (?%-1B), and the other two affect
the coordinate system and pen position when switching into
HP-GL/2 (?%2B and ?%3B).
?%#B
# = –1 - Stand-alone plotter mode (single context)
0 - Use previous HP-GL/2 pen position
1 - Use current PCL CAP
2 - Use current PCL dot coordinate system and
old HP-GL/2 pen position
3 - Use PCL dot coordinate system and the
current PCL CAP
Default = 0
Range = –1 to 3
HP-GL/2 mode remains in effect until a Start Raster
command (?*r#A), Reset (?E), UEL command
(?%-12345X), or power-on.
In stand-alone plotter mode (?%–1B), only a single context
can be used (HP-GL/2 and PCL cannot be merged on the
same page).
A value field of 1 or 3 sets the HP-GL/2 pen position and the
label carriage return point to the current PCL CAP. A value
field of 2 or 3 transfers the current PCL dot coordinate
system, including the PCL origin and axes; the coordinate
system thus established is independent of the positions of
P1 and P2.
This command cannot be executed from display functions
mode or within a binary data transfer. HP-GL/2 ingnores
this command.
Printer-Specific Differences 2-87
Media Type
Command This command sets the print mode required for printing on
various media types.
?&l#M
# = 0 - Plain paper
1 - Bond paper
2 - Special paper
3 - Glossy film
4 - Transparency film
Default = 0
Range = 0 to 4
If no printable data has been sent, this command moves
CAP to the top of form at the left margin of the current
page. If printable data has been sent, the page is closed and
printed, and CAP moves to the top of form at the left
margin of the next physical page.
When transparency media is loaded, the printer auto-
matically adjusts the media type to Transparency and the
print quality to Presentation Graphics, regardless of the
language or remote-panel selection.
The Media Type and Print Quality commands always
override remote control panel settings if the printer detects
a different type of media than was requested. It may
override these commands and the remote control panel
settings.
Note This command may override the remote panel. HP
recommends programmatically setting media type,
especially in network environments.
2-88 Printer-Specific Differences
Print Quality
Command This command determines print quality and speed.
?*o#Q
# = -1 - EconoFast
0 - Normal quality
1 - Best/Presentation graphics
Default = 0
Range = -1, 0, 1
EconoFast prints black text at 300 dpi. When transparency
or glossy media is loaded, the printer automatically adjusts
the media type to Transparency and the print quality to
Presentation graphics, regardless of the language or
remote-panel selection.
The Media Type and Print Quality commands always
override remote control panel settings if the printer detects
a different type of media than was requested. It may
override these commands and the remote control panel
settings.
Note This command must be sent at the beginning of the page
before any printable data; otherwise, when the command is
received, the current page is closed and printed.
Printer-Specific Differences 2-89
Negative Motion
Command The Negative Motion command specifies whether negative
motion will be used, thus determining whether the full page
must be buffered before printing can begin.
?&a#N
# = 0 - Picture contains negative motion (page
formatting printers)
1 - Picture contains no negative motion (swath
printers)
Default = 0
Range = 0, 1
If the page contains no negative motion, using the ?&a1N
command increases print speed.
Negative motion includes:
Vertical motion toward the top of the page
HP-GL/2 operations
Print directions other than 0 degrees
Landscape text
When the top of the character cell on the next line is
above the top of the character cell on the current line
The default value of 0 delays printing until all the
processing of input data for a page is complete. This is for
software that needs to compose the data before printing.
A value of 1 allows data to be printed as received, rather
than first stored in a buffer. Otherwise, printing will be
delayed until all processing of input data is complete.
Note This command must be sent before any printable data is
received by the printer.
2-90 Printer-Specific Differences
HP DeskJet 1600C
Printer The DeskJet 1600C printer is a follow-on to the DeskJet
1200C. It has 600 x 600 dpi black text resolution (plus TES,
which is similar to RET) and 300-dpi color resolution. Like
the 1200C, the DeskJet 1600C is font- and language-
compatible with the latest LaserJet 4 series printers. The
DeskJet 1200C and 1600C contain most of the same PCL 5
color features as the Color LaserJet (described in the PCL 5
Color Technical Reference Manual), with some exceptions
and additions (see Table 1-1). DeskJet 1200C and 1600C
drivers should work on the Color LaserJet, but not vice
versa. Changes from the DeskJet 1200C are listed below.
Additional features include:
Simplified Control Panel. The IEEE-P1284 ECP port
described below allows front-panel simplification and the
elimination of DIP switches. The DeskJet 1600C control
panel is similar to that of the LaserJet 4L, with one
button and four LED indicators.
Feature Status Comments
Raster Resolution
Modified 200 and 600 dpi are supported.
Enter HP-GL/2 Mode
Modified HP-GL/2 standalone mode (-1) is not supported.
Compression Method
Modified Method 9, replacement delta row is added.
Unit of Measure
New Same as LaserJet 4 series printers.
Paper Source
Modified Autoselect (7) is added.
HP-GL/2 in PCL macros
New HP-GL/2 commands may appear in PCL macros.
Noise Dither*
Modified Noise ordered dither (13) and monochrome noise ordered
dither (14) are added.
Downloaded dither Matrix*
Modified The full 16-bit range for height and width is allowed.
Two-Byte Fonts*
New Font header format 16 two-byte font downloading.
Text Parsing Method*
New Same as LaserJet 4PJ printer.
* Also on "B" and "C" versions of the DeskJet 1200C.
Table 2-17. PCL Feature Additions for the HP DeskJet 1600C Printer
Printer-Specific Differences 2-91
IEEE-P1284. This bi-directional enhanced capability
port (ECP) allows most printer features to be monitored
and controlled through Microsoft Windows or a DOS
remote control panel shipped with the product. In
previous HP printers, PJL provided some job-level status
and control, but PJL is embedded in the data stream,
synchronous with the printer description data. With the
implementation if MLC (Multiple Logical Channels) on
the ECP and MIO 6.0, the printer can be controlled and
monitored on a separate channel, asynchronous to the
data stream. PJL still provides control that must be
synchronous with the data stream.
Energy Star. The printer lowers its power consumption
if it has not been used for 15 minutes.
Out-of-Ink Sensing. An LED on the control panel
lights when a pen runs out of ink.
MIO. Modular I/O interface with auto-sensing I/O
configuration.
JetDirect. Optional network cards: Novell, TCP-IP,
LocalTalk, EtherTalk, and third party.
PostScript. A SIMM upgrade is available.
Optional Media Source. An optional sheet feeder tray
is available.
Media Detection. Automatic detection of media size
and media type (transparency).
2-92 Printer-Specific Differences
PJL. Unlike the DeskJet 1200C, which implemented
only the PJL kernel, the DeskJet 1600C printer supports
all of the PJL commands listed below. Full PJL imple-
mentation is not needed because of the multiple-channel
capability of the IEEE-P1284 Extended Capabilities
Port. DeskJet 1600C also supports page protection with
the @PJL SET PAGEPROTECT command.
COMMENT INQUIRE
DEFAULT JOB
ECHO RESET
ENTER SET
EOJ UEL
Print Modes. The DeskJet 1600C has the following
user-selectable print modes:
EconoFast. The primary goal is cost per copy. The
secondary goal is high speed.
Presentation Graphics. Best quality graphics.
Normal. Equal emphasis on quality and throughput.
Best mode for most uses, minimizing the need to switch
to other modes.
Printer-Specific Differences 2-93
Media Source
Command The Paper (Media) Source command (?&l#H) for the
DeskJet 1600C uses a value of 5 for its optional sheet
feeder and also supports a value of 7 (autoselect). A value of
7 selects the current printer default source. The user,
through the application, may select a particular tray for the
first page or pages (for example, a fancy cover page), then
choose autoselect to pull paper from a default tray (for
example, containing standard paper). This is different than
option 0, which continues printing from the currently
selected source. The "default" source may be user-selected,
or based upon the printer’s own algorithm.
Compression Method
Command The Compression Method command (?*b#M) for
the DeskJet 1600C supports Method 9 compression
(compressed replacement delta row encoding) in addition
to compression methods 0, 1, 2, 3, and 5.
Method 9 (Replacement Delta Row Encoding)
Like Method 3, this method replaces only bytes in the
current row that differ from the preceding (seed) row.
Unlike Method 3, the replacement (delta) bytes may be
encoded.
The replacement byte string (delta compression string)
consists of a command byte, optional offset bytes, optional
replacement count bytes, and the replacement data.
Command
Byte Optional Offset Bytes Optional Replacement Count Bytes Data
Bytes
2-94 Printer-Specific Differences
The command byte itself has three parts:
Control Bit Offset Count Replacement Count
Control Bit. Determines whether the replacement data
is compressed, and also the bit boundaries of the
command byte’s other two fields.
Offset Count. The left offset (number of bytes) the
replacement data is offset from the current byte position
in the seed row.
Replacement Count. The number of consecutive bytes
to be replaced. One more byte than the replacement
count is replaced (for example, 6 bytes are replaced by a
replacement count of 5).
Like compression method 3, the “current” byte follows the
last replacement byte; at the beginning of a row, the current
byte immediately follows left raster margin. An offset of 0
indicates the current byte; an offset of 1 indicates the byte
following the current byte.
The size of the offset count and replacement count fields
depends on the value of the control bit.
CONTROL BIT = 0
7 6 3 2 0
Control Bit = 0 Offset Count Replacement Count
If the control bit is 0, the replacement data is
uncompressed. If the control bit is 0, bits 0-2 indicate the
replacement count and bits 3-6 indicate the offset count.
If the offset count is 15, an additional offset count byte
follows and is added to the total offset count. If the offset
count byte is 255, another offset count byte follows. The last
offset count byte is indicated by a value less than 255.
If the replacement count is 7, an additional replacement
count byte follows and is added to the total replacement
Printer-Specific Differences 2-95
count. If the replacement count byte is 255, another
replacement count byte follows. The last replacement count
byte is indicated by a value less than 255. One more than
the total replacement byte count will be replaced.
CONTROL BIT = 1
7 6 5 4 0
Control Bit = 1 Offset Count Replacement Count
If the control bit is 1, the replacement data is run length
encoded. the bit boundaries are different than if the control
bit is 0: bits 5-6 contain the offset count, and bits 0-4
contain the replacement count. As when the control bit is 0,
optional offset bytes and replacement bytes may be added.
2-96 Printer-Specific Differences
HP LaserJet 5 and
5M Printers HP LaserJet 5 and 5M printers are performance-enhanced
follow-on products for HP LaserJet 4 Plus and 4M Plus
printers, respectively. The enhanced PCL 5 printer
language in these printers include all of the PCL 5 features
supported by HP LaserJet 4 Plus and 4M Plus printers as
well as the features listed in Table 2-18.
Text Parsing When 2-byte text parsing methods were introduced in HP
LaserJets (from LaserJet 4PJ on), the default text parsing
method was based on the default symbol set. For example,
if a user selected Roman-8 as the default symbol set
(via the control panel or a PJL command), then 1-byte
text parsing was the default method. If they selected
WINJ-DBCS as the default symbol set, Shift-JIS text
parsing was the default method.
HP LaserJet printers (from LaserJet 5 and 5M on) now
base the default text parsing method on the font type and
symbol set fields in the default font. If the default font is a
16-bit font, the default text parsing method is set to one
that matches the symbol set field. In all other cases, the
default text parsing method is set to 1-byte text parsing.
Feature Status Comments
Character Text Path Direction Command
Modified A new algorithm decides whether or not to counter-
rotate characters when using the vertical rotated
printing mode.
Text Parsing Method Command
Modified The default text parsing method is based on the font
type and symbol set fields in the default font.
Label Mode (LM) Command
New HP-GL/2 support for 2-byte applications.
Table 2-18. PCL Feature Modifications for HP Color LaserJet 5 and 5M Printers
Printer-Specific Differences 2-97
Two-Byte HP-GL/2
Support One-byte applications (which support non-orthogonal
rotation, scaling, and shearing of text) have long been able
to use HP-GL/2 to print to HP LaserJet printers. Two-byte
applications have not had this capability until the
introduction of HP LaserJet 5 and 5M printers.
The capability of 2-byte applications (which support
non-orthogonal rotation, scaling, and shearing of text) to
print to HP LaserJet printers using HP-GL/2 is provided by
the Label Mode (LM) command.
Label Mode
Command Determines how the Label (LB) and Symbol Mode (SM)
commands interpret characters. Used for printing a 2-byte
character set such as WinJ-DBCS, GB2312, or Big-5.
Syntax:
LM(mode,[row number]:)
Parameter Format Functional
Range Default
mode clamped
integer 0, 1, 2, or
30 (8-bitmode)
row number clamped
integer 0 to 255 0
2-98 Printer-Specific Differences
Comments:
MODE. Determines the interpretation mode as follows:
0 Interprets each byte as a character (8-bit mode
where the default row_number equals "0").
Computed character code is equal to
(row_number * 256) + 8-bit code sent in LB or SM
command.
1 Interprets the next two bytes as a character (16-bit
mode). LB and SM commands will read two bytes
to form one 2-byte character code equal to
(first_byte * 256) + second_byte. Label terminator
and 8-bit control codes must be preceded by a
NULL byte. To turn symbol mode off while in 16-bit
mode, you must send SM<NULL>; where NULL is
ASCII or decimal 0.
2 Same logic as mode 0, except that vertical
substitutes are used if found in a VT segment of
the current font. Characters are rotated counter
clock-wise to match the vertical-rotated printing
mode of the Character Text Path Direction
command. Default row_number equals "0".
3 Same input logic as mode 1, except that vertical
substitutes are used if found in a VT segment of
the current font. Full width characters are rotated
counter clock-wise to match the vertical-rotated
printing mode of the Character Text Path Direction
command.
Printer-Specific Differences 2-99
Row Number. Used only in modes 0 and 2 (8-bit
modes) when a 16-bit character set is selected. The row
number indicates the first byte while the LB or SM
instruction will supply the second byte.
For example, if you send LMO,37, and you have selected
a 16-bit character set, sending LBAB<TERM> would
result in the device printing characters 65 and 66 from
row 37 of the character set grid.
If you are using an 8-bit character set in 16-bit mode
(modes 1 or 3), you must specify the first byte of each
character as 0. All other first byte calues are treated as
undefined characters.
Notes:
When LM switches modes, it turns off symbol mode
(executes SM;).
LM affects the way SM and LB interpret bytes.
LM does not affect the DT or DL commands.
DT allows 8-bit terminator definitions only. To terminate
a label in 16-bit mode, precede the current label termina-
tor by the null character (decimal 0). The only exception
is the ?E (Reset) instruction in dual-context devices. ?E
is executed regardless of the byte boundaries within LB
and SM.
2-100 Printer-Specific Differences
Vertical Writing with
Proportional Fonts The Character Text Path Direction command was
introduced with the HP LaserJet 4PJ printer to allow users
to vertically rotate Asian fonts which were dual pitched.
That is, the single-byte characters were half-width and the
other characters were full-width.
An algorithm was implemented to determine whether or
not to counter-rotate characters when using the
vertical-rotated printing mode of the Character Text Path
Direction command. A character is rotated if the glyph is
full-width; otherwise, the character is not rotated.
Since the introduction of the LaserJet 4PJ, many vendors
have produced proportional versions of their Asian fonts.
Thus, the algorithm described above is no longer
appropriate for determining character rotation.
A new method to explicitly enumerate which characters
should be counter-rotated in the font is being introduced
with HP LaserJet 5 and 5M printers. The new method
consists of adding an optional font segment to Font Format
16. The optional segment, which is called the Vertical
Exception (VE) segment, has the following form:
UBYTE[2] SEGMENT ID = ’VE’
UBYTE Format = 0
(other values reserved)
UBYTE NumRanges = N
UINT16 Range1FirstCode
UINT16 Range1LastCode
•
•
•
UINT16 RangeNFirstCode
UINT16 RangeNLastCode
Printer-Specific Differences 2-101
The new algorithm for deciding whether or not to
counter-rotate characters (when using the Character Text
Path Direction command’s vertical-rotated printing mode)
is as follows:
if (the current font contains a VE segment)
{
if(the character code* is NOT contained in
a VE range)
rotate
else
don’t rotate
}
else
use the old logic
* The original character code, even if a galley character
were substituted at some point.
Examples:
Japanese ShiftJIS Japanese Unicode
Segment ID V E V E
Format/NumRanges 0 1 0 2
Range1FirstCode 0x0000 0x0000 half-width latin
characters
Range1LastCode 0x00FF 0x007F
Range2FirstCode 0xFF61 half-width
katakana
Range2LastCode 0xFF9F
2-102 Printer-Specific Differences
HP Color LaserJet
5 and 5M Printers HP Color LaserJet 5 and 5M printers use new HP Image
Resolution Enhancement technology 1200 (HP Image REt
1200) to project outstanding text, graphics, and more
vibrant colors than before.
The HP Color LaserJet 5M printer is network-ready with
genuine Adobe PostScript Level 2 software, 36 Mbytes of
memory, and an HP JetDirect card. The HP Color LaserJet
5 printer is upgradable so you can tailor it to suit the needs
of your particular environment.
HP Color LaserJet 5 and 5M printers can use glossy paper
or transparency film for special output.
Modifications to the PCL language for HP Color LaserJet 5
and 5M printers are summarized in the table below and are
described in detail in the PCL 5 Color Technical Reference
Manual (P/N 5961-0940):
Feature Status Comments
Render Algorithm Command
Modified Five new algorithms have been added.
Configure Image Data Command
Modified Has unique functionality while in PCL Imaging mode.
Download Dither Matrix Command
Support Not supported.
Driver Configuration Command
Support Do not support all features of the function_index argument.
Download Pattern Command
Modified Restricts the width and height of a user pattern to less than
16384 pixels.
Scale Algorithm Command
Support Not supported.
Font Cartridges
Support Not supported. Customized fonts, if needed, can be utilized
via SIMMs.
Table 2-19. PCL Feature Modifications for HP Color LaserJet 5 and 5M Printers
Printer-Specific Differences 2-103
Render Algorithm
Command The Render Algorithm command selects the algorithm to be
used for rendering page marking entities on a given page.
?*t#J
# = 0-14 - See section 4, “Modifying Output Color”
in the PCL 5 Color Technical Reference
Manual for information on algorithms
0 through 14.
15 - Continuous tone smooth 150 lpi
16 - Monochrome continuous tone detail
300 lpi
17 - Monochrome continuous tone smooth
150 lpi
18 - Continuous tone basic 100 lpi
19 - Monochrome continuous tone basic
100 lpi
Default = 3
Range = 0 to 19 (invalid values are ignored;
values 1, 2, 9, and 10 are ignored for
device-independent color)
HP Color LaserJet 5 and 5M printers remap non-continous
tone render algorithms (3 - 14) into continuous tone smooth
(15) and monochrome continuous tone smooth (17)
algorithms.
2-104 Printer-Specific Differences
HP LaserJet 6P/
6MP Printers The HP LaserJet 6P and 6MP printers are similar to the
LaserJet 5P and 5MP printers, with the addition of higher
performance and faster print speed (up to 8 ppm). The PCL
5 feature set is identical to the LaserJet 5P/5MP printers,
with the exception that the LaserJet 6P/6MP printers
support some additional paper sizes (A5, JIS B5, JIS B4,
and Oufuku-Hagaki postcards).
The HP LaserJet 6MP printer also includes the Adobe
PostScript Level 2 printer language with 35 additional
built-in PostScript fonts.
HP LaserJet 5Si
Mopier The HP LaserJet 5Si Mopier combines the performance and
network strengths of the LaserJet 5Si/5SiMx printers with
the ability to print, collate, and staple multiple copies of a
document. The LaserJet 5Si Mopier has the same PCL
feature set as the LaserJet 5Si/5Si printers, but allows you
to download a document just once and then print as many
originals as you need.
Multiple-original printing (“mopying”) and stapling is
accomplished using PJL commands. The application soft-
ware, using PJL commands, determines to which output
bin the printed copy will be delivered. If the stapling bin is
selected, the job is automatically stapled.
Note Multiple mopies are produced using the PJL SET QTY
command. In order for the mopier to produce more than one
original of a print job, the PCL number of copies command
(?&l#X) must not be included in the data stream, since this
command will limit the job to one copy or produce multiple
uncollated copies.
See the PJL Printer Job Language Technical Reference
Manual for a PJL example of printing to the mopier.
Printer-Specific Differences 2-105
HP LaserJet 6L
Printer The HP LaserJet 6L printer looks like the LaserJet 5L
printer and has an identical PCL feature set. At 6 pages-
per-minute, it prints two more pages per minute than the
LaserJet 5L, contains the same standard typefaces, and
supports the same paper sizes. Like the LaserJet 5L, the
LaserJet 6L printer does not have a control panel.
(Refer to Table 1-1, HP LaserJet Printer Feature
Comparison, for the specific PCL implementation.)
HP LaserJet 4000
Series Printers The HP LaserJet 4000 series printers are similar to the
LaserJet 5/5M printers in their design and PCL feature set.
They support a very similar set of paper sizes. (Refer to
Table 1-1, HP LaserJet Printer Feature Comparison, for the
specific PCL implementation.)
Selecting Media Type Besides using the Media Type command (?&l#M) to select
a print media, with the LaserJet 4000 series printers you
can also use the Alphanumeric ID command as follows:
?&n11W[binary 100][name]
where name is a media type string such as “Preprinted”
For example:
?&n6W[binary 100]Legal
selects the “Legal” media type.
For more information on the Alphanumeric ID command,
see page 2-79.
2-106 Printer-Specific Differences
3
Internal Typefaces/Fonts and Symbol Sets
Introduction This chapter identifies the internal typefaces/fonts and
their associated symbol sets available in the various
printers. This information is presented first for bitmap
fonts and their symbol sets, then for scalable typefaces and
their symbol sets.
Note Internal refers to those typefaces/fonts and symbol sets
which are resident in the printer.
Fonts 3-1
Bitmap Fonts and
Symbol Sets Table 3-1 identifies the resident bitmap fonts for the
printers. The supported symbol sets for these bitmap fonts
are shown in Table 3-2. The HP LaserJet III, IIID, IIIP, and
IIISi printers contained all these bitmap fonts. However,
with the introduction of the HP LaserJet 4 printer, the
bitmap Courier was replaced by a scalable Courier typeface
(refer to “Scalable Typefaces and Symbol Sets”). The HP
LaserJet 4L, 5L, and 6L printers do not contain any bitmap
fonts. If this printer receives a request for Line Printer, the
fixed-pitch scalable Courier typeface is substituted. Except
as noted, the DeskJet 1200C and 1600C support the same
fonts and symbol sets as the HP LaserJet 4 printer.
Table 3-2 identifies the symbol sets available for the
internal bitmap fonts. Note that this list is for the bitmap
fonts only. For the scalable typeface symbol sets, refer to
the section “Scalable Typefaces and Symbol Sets.”
Typeface Pitch/Point
Treatment
Orientation III, IIID, IIIP,
IIISi
4, 4M, 4P, 4MP, 4Si, 4ML, 4PJ, 4LJ Pro,
4LC, 4Plus, 4M Plus, 4000 series, 4V,
4MV, 5P, 5MP, 6P, 6MP, 5Si, 5SiMx,
5Si Mopier, 5, 5M, Color LJ, Color LJ
5, Color LJ 5M, DJ 1200C, DJ 1600C
4L 5L
6L
Courier 10/12 Med P & L ✓nr nr nr
Courier 10/12 Italic P ✓nr nr nr
Courier 10/12 Bold P & L ✓nr nr nr
Courier 12/10 Med P ✓nr nr nr
Courier 12/10 Italic P ✓nr nr nr
Courier 12/10 Bold P ✓nr nr nr
Line Printer 16.67/8.5
Med P & L ✓✓nr nr
nr - not resident P - Portrait L - Landscape
Table 3-1. Bitmap Fonts (All Fixed Pitch)
3-2 Fonts
Scalable Typefaces
and Symbol Sets Table 3-3 lists the internal scalable Intellifont typefaces
resident in the various printers. Table 3-4 lists the
TrueType typefaces. Most of these typefaces are unbound;
that is they can be linked to any of the available symbol
sets (with the limitations indicated). The symbol sets to
which a typeface can be bound are identified in Tables 3-5,
3-6, and 3-7. (A list of all of the assigned symbol set and
typeface codes is provided in Tables B-1, B-2, and B-3.)
Symbol Set1
Roman-8 ISO 57 Chinese2
ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 (ECMA-94) ISO 25 French2
PC-8 ISO 2 IRV2
PC-8 Danish/Norwegian ISO 14 JIS ASCII2
PC-850 ISO 61 Norwegian v22
ISO 6 ASCII ISO 16 Portuguese2
Legal ISO 84 Portuguese2
ISO 21 German ISO 85 Spanish2
ISO 17 Spanish ISO 10 Swedish/Finnish2
ISO 69 French HP German2
ISO 15 Italian HP Spanish2
ISO 60 Norwegian v1 ISO 8859/2 Latin 23
ISO 4 United Kingdom ISO 8859/9 Latin 53
ISO 11 Swedish: names ISO 8859/10 Latin 64
1
PCL 5 printers support an extensive range of additional symbol sets. Some of the more common sets and their associated IDs are listed in
Appendix C of this guide.
2
These symbol sets are becoming obsolete, are not recommended for future use, and are not resident on HP LaserJet 4, 4M, 4Si, 4SiMx, 4L,
4ML, 4P, 4MP, 4PJ, 4 Plus, 4M Plus, 4V, 4MV, 4LJ Pro, 4LC, 4000 series, HP LaserJet 5 family, LaserJet 6 family, HP Color LaserJet fam-
ily, and HP DeskJet 1200C and 1600C printers.
3
The ISO Latin 2 and 5 symbol sets are not supported on HP LaserJet III family and HP LaserJet 4, 4M, 4Si, 4SiMx, 4L, HP DeskJet 1200C
and 1600C printers.
4
Resident on HP LaserJet 5, 5M, and 4000 series printers only.
Table 3-2. Bitmap Symbol Sets
Fonts 3-3
Typeface Treatment Typeface
Number III,
IIID,
IIIP
IIISi 5P, 5Si, 5SiMx,
5Si Mopier,
6P, 6MP,
Color LJ,
Color LJ 5/5M,
DJ 1200C,
DJ 1600C,
LJ 4 family,
4000 series
4PJ
4LJ
Pro
4L
5L
6L
4LC 5
5M
ITC Zapf Dingbats Med 4141 nr ✓nr nr nr nr nr
CG Times Med, It, Bld, Bld It 4101 ✓✓ ✓ nr ✓✓
nr
Univers Med, It, Bld, Bld It 4148 ✓✓ ✓ nr ✓✓
nr
Univers Cond Med Cnd, It Cnd,
Bld Cnd, Bld It Cnd 4148 nr ✓✓
nr ✓✓
nr
Courier Med, It, Bld, Bld It 4099 nr nr ✓ ✓✓✓
nr
Letter Gothic Med, It, Bld 4102 nr nr ✓nr ✓✓
nr
Albertus Med (semi-bold),
Extra Bld 4362 nr nr ✓nr ✓✓
nr
Antique Olive Med, It, Bld 4168 nr nr ✓nr ✓✓
nr
Clarendon Cond. Bld Cnd 4140 nr nr ✓nr nr ✓nr
Coronet Med It 4116 nr nr ✓nr ✓✓
nr
Garamond Antiqua (Med),
Kursiv (It),
Halbfett (Bd),
Kursiv Halb
4197 nr nr ✓nr nr ✓nr
Marigold Med 4297 nr nr ✓nr nr ✓nr
CG Omega Med, It, Bld, Bld It 4113 nr nr ✓nr nr ✓nr
Wingdings Med 6826 nr nr nr nr ✓nr nr
✓
- resident in the printer nr - not resident in the printer
Table 3-3. Scalable Intellifont Typefaces
3-4 Fonts
Typeface Treatment Typeface
Number III,
IIID,
IIIP
IIISi 5P, 5Si, 5SiMx,
5Si Mopier,
6P, 6MP,
Color LJ,
Color LJ 5/5M,
DJ 1200C,
DJ 1600C,
LJ 4 family
4PJ
4LJ
Pro
4L
5L
6L
4LC 5,
5M,
4000
series
Arial Med, It, Bld, Bld It 16602 nr nr ✓✓
nr ✓✓
Times New Roman Med, It, Bld, Bld It 16901 nr nr ✓✓
nr ✓✓
Symbol Med 16686 nr nr ✓✓
nr ✓✓
Wingdings Med 31402 nr nr ✓✓
nr ✓✓
CG Times Med, It, Bld, Bld It 4101 nr nr nr nr nr nr ✓
Univers Med, It, Bld, Bld It 4148 nr nr nr nr nr nr ✓
Univers Cond Med Cnd, It Cnd,
Bld Cnd, Bld It Cnd 4148 nr nr nr nr nr nr ✓
Courier Med, It, Bld, Bld It 4099 nr nr nr nr nr nr ✓
Letter Gothic Med, It, Bld 4102 nr nr nr nr nr nr ✓
Albertus Med (semi-bold),
Extra Bld 4362 nr nr nr nr nr nr ✓
Antique Olive Med, It, Bld 4168 nr nr nr nr nr nr ✓
Clarendon Cond. Bld Cnd 4140 nr nr nr nr nr nr ✓
Coronet Med It 4116 nr nr nr nr nr nr ✓
Garamond Antiqua (Med),
Kursiv (It),
Halbfett (Bd),
Kursiv Halb
4197 nr nr nr nr nr nr ✓
Marigold Med 4297 nr nr nr nr nr nr ✓
CG Omega Med, It, Bld, Bld It 4113 nr nr nr nr nr nr ✓
Wingdings Med 6826 nr nr nr nr nr nr nr
MS Mincho Med128752 nr nr nr ✓nr nr nr
MS Gothic Med128825 nr nr nr ✓nr nr nr
SimSun Med137058 nr nr nr nr nr ✓nr
Sim Hei Med137110 nr nr nr nr nr ✓nr
GW-Kai Med137357 nr nr nr nr nr ✓nr
✓
- resident in the printer nr - not resident in the printer
1
Pseudo-bold, pseudo-italic, and pseudo-bold italic are available using character enhancements.
Table 3-4. Scalable TrueType Typefaces
Fonts 3-5
Symbol Set1
Printer
III, IIID, IIIP IIISi LaserJet 4 / 5 / 6 Families,
Color LaserJet Family,
DeskJet 1200C & 1600C
4PJ
4LJ Pro
4LC
Roman-8 ✓✓ ✓ ✓
ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 ✓✓ ✓ ✓
PC-8 ✓✓ ✓ ✓
PC-8 Danish/Norwegian ✓✓ ✓ ✓
PC-850 ✓✓ ✓ ✓
ISO 6 ASCII ✓✓ ✓ ✓
Legal ✓✓ ✓ ✓
ISO 21 German ✓✓ ✓ ✓
ISO 17 Spanish ✓✓ ✓ ✓
ISO 69 French ✓✓ ✓ ✓
ISO 15 Italian ✓✓ ✓ ✓
ISO 60 Norwegian v1 ✓✓ ✓ ✓
ISO 4 United Kingdom ✓✓ ✓ ✓
ISO 11 Swedish: names ✓✓ ✓ ✓
ISO 57 Chinese2 ✓✓ nr ✓
ISO 25 French2 ✓✓ nr ✓
ISO 2 IRV2 ✓✓ nr ✓
ISO 14 JIS ASCII2 ✓✓ nr ✓
ISO 61 Norwegian v22 ✓✓ nr ✓
ISO 16 Portuguese2 ✓✓ nr ✓
ISO 84 Portuguese2 ✓✓ nr ✓
ISO 85 Spanish2 ✓✓ nr ✓
ISO 10 Swedish/Finnish2 ✓✓ nr ✓
HP German2 ✓✓ nr ✓
HP Spanish2 ✓✓ nr ✓
✓
- symbol set is resident. nr - symbol set is not resident.
1
PCL 5 printers support an extensive range of additional symbol sets. Some of the more common sets and their associated IDs are shown in
Appendix C of this guide.
2
These symbol sets are soon to be obsolete, are not recommended for future use, and are not resident on any DeskJet 1200C or
DeskJet 1600C.
Table 3-5. Scalable Symbol Sets
3-6 Fonts
Symbol Set1
HP LaserJet Printer
III, IIID, IIIP IIISi LaserJet 4/5 Families
Color LaserJet Family,
DeskJet 1200C & 1600C 4LC 6L 5, 5M,
4000 series,
6P, 6MP
PC-1004 (OS/2) nr nr nr nr nr ✓
DeskTop ✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓
Ventura International 2 ✓✓ ✓ ✓✓
nr
PS Text ✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓
Ventura US 2✓✓ ✓ ✓✓
nr
Microsoft Publishing ✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓
Math-8 ✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓
Ventura Math 2✓✓ ✓ ✓✓
nr
PS Math ✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓
Pi Font ✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓
Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats 2 nr ✓nr nr nr nr
PS ITC Zapf Dingbats nr ✓nr nr nr nr
ITC Zapf Dingbats 100 nr ✓nr nr nr nr
ITC Zapf Dingbats 200 nr ✓nr nr nr nr
ITC Zapf Dingbats 300 nr ✓nr nr nr nr
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2 nr nr ✓ ✓✓✓
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 nr nr ✓ ✓✓✓
ISO 8859-10 Latin 6 nr nr nr nr nr ✓
PC 852 nr nr ✓ ✓✓✓
PC 775 nr nr nr nr nr ✓
PC Turkish nr nr ✓ ✓✓✓
MC Text nr nr ✓ ✓✓✓
Windows 3.1 Latin 1 nr nr ✓ ✓✓✓
Windows 3.1 Latin 2 nr nr ✓ ✓✓✓
Windows 3.1 Latin 5 nr nr ✓ ✓✓✓
Windows Baltic (not 3.1) nr nr nr nr nr ✓
Windows 3.0 Latin 1 ✓✓ ✓ ✓✓✓
Windows 3.1J (WIN3.1J) nr nr ✓3nr ✓3nr
GB2312 nr nr nr ✓nr nr
Symbol nr nr ✓4✓✓
4✓
Wingdings nr nr ✓4✓✓
4✓
✓
- Indicates a symbol set is supported. nr - Indicates a symbol set is not resident.
1
PCL 5 printers support an extensive range of additional symbol sets. Some of the more common sets and their associated IDs are shown in
Appendix C of this guide.
2
These symbol sets are soon to be obsolete and are not recommended for future use.
3
The Japanese Windows 3.1J symbol set is only resident in the LaserJet 4PJ, 4LJ Pro, and LaserJet 4V, 4MV, 5Si, 5SiMx, 5Si Mopier print-
ers if ESC/P SIMM installed.
4
The HP LaserJet 4L, 5L, and 6L printers do not support the Symbol symbol set.
Table 3-5. Scalable Symbol Sets (continued)
Fonts 3-7
PCL Symbol
Set ID Symbol Set CG
Times Univers Courier Letter
Gothic Albertus Antique
Olive Coronet Univers
Cond.
8U Roman-8 • • • • • •••
0N ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 (ECMA 94 Latin 1) • • • • • •••
10U PC-8 • • • • • •••
11U PC-8 D/N • • • • • •••
12U PC-850 • • • • • •••
19U Windows 3.1 Latin1 (ANSI) • • • • • •••
7J DeskTop • • • • • •••
10J PS Text • • • • • •••
13J Ventura International • • • • • •••
14J Ventura US • • • • • •••
6J Microsoft Publishing • • • • • •••
1U Legal • • • • • •••
1E ISO United Kingdom* • • • • • •••
0U ASCII* • • • • • •••
0S ISO Swedish: names* • • • • • •••
0I ISO Italian* • • • • • •••
2S ISO Spanish* • • • • • •••
1G ISO German* • • • • • •••
0D ISO Norwegian* • • • • • •••
1F ISO French* • • • • • •••
9U Windows 3.0 Latin 1 • • • • • •••
12J MC Text ••••••••
17U PC-852 ••••◆ ◆◆◆
9T PC-Turkish ••••◆ ◆◆◆
9E Windows 3.1 Latin 2 ••••◆ ◆◆◆
5T Windows 3.1 Latin 5 ••••◆ ◆◆◆
2N ISO 8859-2 Latin 2 ••••◆ ◆◆◆
5N ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 ••••◆ ◆◆◆
8M Math-8 ••••
5M PS Math ••••
6M Ventura Math ••••
15U Pi Font ••••
19M Symbol
579L Wingdings
•
Fonts supported by Color LaserJet family, DeskJet 1200C, LaserJet 4/5 families except 4PJ, 4LJ Pro, 4000 series, 5, and 5M. Courier is
the only Intellifont typeface family supported by the LaserJet 4PJ printer.
◆
Additional fonts supported by DeskJet 1200C,1600C (B,C revs.) & LaserJet 4/5/6 families except 4,4M,4Si,4SiMx,4PJ,4LJ Pro,4000 series,
5,5M.
Table 3-6. Intellifont Typeface Symbol Set Support
3-8 Fonts
PCL Symbol
Set ID Symbol Set
Clarend.
Cond. Marigold CG Omega Garmnd.
Antiqua Wingdings
8U Roman-8 ••••
0N ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 (ECMA 94 Latin 1) ••••
10U PC-8 ••••
11U PC-8 D/N ••••
12U PC-850 ••••
19U Windows 3.1 Latin 1 (ANSI) ••••
7J DeskTop ••••
10J PS Text ••••
13J Ventura International ••••
14J Ventura US ••••
6J Microsoft Publishing ••••
1U Legal ••••
1E ISO United Kingdom * ••••
0U ASCII* ••••
0S ISO Swedish: names* ••••
0I ISO Italian* ••••
2S ISO Spanish* ••••
1G ISO German* ••••
0D ISO Norwegian* ••••
1F ISO French* ••••
9U Windows 3.0 Latin 1 (Windows) ••••
12J MC Text ••••
17U PC-852 ◆◆ ◆◆
9T PC-Turkish ◆◆ ◆◆
9E Windows 3.1 Latin 2 ◆◆ ◆◆
5T Windows 3.1 Latin 5 ◆◆ ◆◆
2N ISO 8859-2 Latin 2 ◆◆ ◆◆
5N ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 ◆◆ ◆◆
8M Math-8
5M PS Math
6M Ventura Math
15U Pi Font
19M Symbol
579L Wingdings ▲
•
Supported by all LaserJet 4 / 5 / 6 family printers except 4PJ, 4L, 5L, 6L, 4LJ Pro, 4000 series, 5, and 5M.
▲
Additional font supported by the HP LaserJet 4L, 5L, 6L, DeskJet 1200C (B and C revisions), and 1600C only.
◆
Additional fonts supported by LaserJet 4ML, 4P, 4MP, 4LJ Pro, 4 Plus, 4M Plus, 4V,4MV,4000 series, Color LJ, LaserJet 5/6 families except 5,
5M.
Table 3-6. Intellifont Typeface Symbol Set Support (continued)
Fonts 3-9
Scalable TrueType Typefaces Bitmap
Font
PCL
Symbol
Set ID
Symbol Set Arial Times
New
Roman
Wing-
dings Symbol MS
Mincho,
MS Gothic
Sim Sun
Sim Hei
GW-Kai
Line
Printer
8U Roman-8 •• •
0N ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 (was ECMA 94 Latin 1) •• •
10U PC-8 •• •
11U PC-8 D/N •• •
12U PC-850 •• •
19U Windows 3.1 Latin 1 (Microsoft “ANSI”) ••
9J PC-1004 (OS/2) ◆◆
7J DeskTop ••
10J PS Text •• ★
13J Ventura International ••
14J Ventura US ••
6J Microsoft Publishing ◆◆
1U Legal •• •
1E ISO United Kingdom * •• •
0U ASCII* •• •
0S ISO Swedish: names* •• •
0I ISO Italian* •• •
2S ISO Spanish* •• •
1G ISO German* •• •
0D ISO Norwegian* •• •
1F ISO French* •• •
9U Windows 3.0 Latin 1 (formerly “Windows”) ••
12J MC Text ••
17U PC-852 ••
26U PC-775 ◆◆
9T PC-Turkish ••
9E Windows 3.1 Latin 2 ••
19L Windows Baltic (not 3.1) ◆◆
5T Windows 3.1 Latin 5 ••
2N ISO 8859-2 Latin 2 •• ▲
•
Fonts supported by HP LaserJet 4, 4Si, 4ML, 4P, 4MP, 4PJ, 4Plus, 4M Plus, 4V, 4MV, 4LJ Pro, 4LC, 4000 series, 5P, 5Si, 5SiMx,
5Si Mopier, 5, 5M, 6P, 6MP, Color LaserJet, Color LaserJet 5, and 5M printers.
◆
Additional fonts supported by HP LaserJet 5, 5M, and 4000 series printers.
★
Not supported by HP LaserJet 5, 5M, and 4000 series printers as well as Ventura synbol sets.
*
These subsets are variations of the Roman-8 set.
▲
Fonts supported by HP LaserJet 4ML, 4P, 4MP, 4PJ, 4 Plus, 4M Plus, 4V, 4MV, 4000 series, 5Si, 5SiMx, 5Si Mopier, 5, 5M, 6P, 6MP,
Color LaserJet, Color LaserJet 5, and 5M printers.
Table 3-7. TrueType Typeface Symbol Set Support
3-10 Fonts
Scalable TrueType Typefaces Bitmap
Font
PCL
Symbol
Set ID
Symbol Set Arial Times
New
Roman
Wing-
dings Symbol MS
Mincho,
MS Gothic
Sim Sun
Sim Hei
GW-Kai
Line
Printer
5N ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 •• ▲
6N ISO 8859-10 Latin 6 ◆◆ ◆
8M Math-8 ◆◆
5M PS Math ◆◆
6M Ventura Math
15U Pi Font ◆◆
19M Symbol •
579L Wingdings •
19K Japanese Windows 3.1J (WIN3.1J) ★
19C GB2312 •
•
Fonts supported by HP LaserJet 4, 4Si, 4ML, 4P, 4MP, 4PJ, 4Plus, 4M Plus, 4V, 4MV, 4LJ Pro, 4LC, 4000 series, 5P, 5Si, 5SiMx,
5Si Mopier, 5, 5M, 6P, 6MP, Color LaserJet, Color LaserJet 5, and 5M printers.
▲
Fonts supported by HP LaserJet 4ML, 4P, 4MP, 4PJ, 4 Plus, 4M Plus, 4V, 4MV, 5Si, 5SiMx, 5Si Mopier, 6P, 6MP, Color LaserJet,
Color LaserJet 5, and 5M printers.
◆
Additional fonts supported by HP LaserJet 5, 5M, and 4000 series printers.
★
Only for HP LaserJet 4PJ, 4LJ Pro, & 4V/4MV, 5Si/5SiMx and 5Si Mopier if ESC/P SIMM installed.
Table 3-7. TrueType Typeface Symbol Set Support (continued)
Fonts 3-11
Typeface Selection
Differences With the introduction of the HP LaserJet IID printer,
Hewlett-Packard expanded the typeface value field (in the
font header) from a one-byte to a two-byte value field, thus
expanding the typeface range from 0-255 to 0-32767. This
expansion allows for additional typefaces.
Prior to the HP LaserJet IID printer, typeface values used a
single byte (8-bits for a range of 0-255) for font selection.
This value, referred to as the typeface base value, was used
to identify fonts for selection. With the addition of the
second byte in the typeface value field, one bit was added to
the typeface base value range, increasing it from 8 bits to
9 bits (for a range of 0-511). This allows a greater range for
typeface base value selection.
In addition to expanding the typeface base value, two other
values were included in the two-byte typeface value:
vendor number and vendor version. The vendor
number identifies the font vendor and the vendor version
identifies the version of the font. These two values are for a
vendor to create an updated version of the typeface. The
three values together represent the typeface family
value. Refer to the PCL 5 Printer Language Technical
Reference Manual Chapter 11,“Font Creation - Typeface
Family,” for a more complete description of this two-byte
typeface family value.
Note With the introduction of the HP LaserJet 4 printer, HP
redefined the typeface field again, this time eliminating the
vendor version identifier and expanding the typeface family
to encompass the 12 least significant bits (bits 11-0) of this
16-bit field (see the field description for “Typeface” in
Chapter 11).
3-12 Fonts
Both the typeface family value and the typeface base value
can be used for font selection. Since the typeface family
value (two-byte value) is based on the typeface base value
(9 bit value), a font selection which specifies the typeface
base value may select a font described by a typeface family
value in the printer.
There is some variation in how font selection occurs
between PCL 5 printer models when mixing the typeface
family and base values. The typeface selection compatibility
for two types of values is identified for the various PCL 5
printers in Table 3-8.
Some typeface (two-byte) family values and their
corresponding base values are listed below. For a complete
listing of typeface family and base values, refer to Tables
C-2 and C-3 in Appendix C of this document.
Family
Value Typeface Family Base
Value
0 Line Printer 0
16602 Arial 218
4168 Antique Olive 72
4127 ITC Avant Garde 31
4119 CG Century Schoolbook 23
4101 CG Times 5
4148 Univers 52
Typeface Values
Fonts 3-13
Typeface
Selection
Command
?
(s#T Type
Printer Font
Descriptor
Type PCL 5
Printer IIP IID series II
1
Family
Value Family
Value Typeface
Selected Typeface
Selected Typeface
Selected Ignores typeface
(value field too large)
Family
Value Base
Value Ignores
typeface
for font
selection
Ignores
typeface
for font
selection
Ignores
typeface
for font
selection
Ignores typeface for
font selection
(value field too large)
Base
Value Family
Value Typeface
Selected2Ignores
typeface
for font
selection
Ignores
typeface
for font
selection
Typeface may be
selected
(font descriptor
typeface MSB field is
ignored)3
Base
Value Base
Value Typeface
Selected Typeface
Selected Typeface
Selected Typeface Selected
This table assumes that the typeface type specified is available in the printer.
1
The LaserJet series II printer only accepts a typeface selection value field range of 0-255.
2
If two fonts are available in the printer that have the same value in the lower (LSB) byte of the font descriptor typeface field (such as 5 and
4101), the typeface selected will be one of these selected at random.
3
The MSB typeface byte in the Font Descriptor is ignored by the printer; only the LSB typeface byte is read.
Table 3-8. Base/Family Typeface Selection Compatibility
3-14 Fonts
4
Print Environment
Introduction All of a printer’s current feature settings are collectively
referred to as a print environment. A PCL printer
maintains four print environments: Factory Default
Environment, User Default Environment, Modified Print,
and Overlay Environment.
This chapter identifies the Factory Default Environment
and User Default Environment. The Factory Default
Environment, which is programmed into a printer at the
factory, is listed in Table 4-1 for the PCL context and
Table 4-2 for the HP-GL/2 context. The User Default
Environment, which can be set from a printer’s control
panel, is listed in Table 4-3.
Note If a feature setting is not supported on a printer (for exam-
ple, duplex on non-duplex printers, or status readback on
printers which do not support that feature), then the
printer’s print environment does not contain that feature
setting. In the following tables, not all values are used for
all printers. See Table 1-1 to identify supported values for a
certain HP printer.
The HP LaserJet 4PJ printer defaults to the ESC/P person-
ality. The defaults listed here are for PCL only.
Print Environment 4-1
JOB CONTROL
Number of Copies11
Duplex1Off (Simplex)
Binding2Long-edge
Registration Left=0, Top=0
Tray Lock1All trays unlocked
Manual Feed1Off
Job Separation3Off
Output Bin Upper (face down) bin
Units of Measure 300 Units/inch
PAGE CONTROL
Print Direction 0
Orientation1Portrait
Page Size1Letter
Paper (Media) Source Paper Source (Printer Specific Large
Source)
Media Destination 0 (Automatic Selection)
Vertical Motion Index18 (6 lpi)
Horizontal Motion Index412 (10 cpi)
Top Margin 1/2" (150 dots)
Text Length 60 lines
Left Margin Left logical page boundary
Right Margin Right logical page boundary
Perforation Skip On
Line Termination CR→CR, LF→LF, FF→FF
1
User can select default values from the printer’s Operator Control Panel for these feature settings.
2
Selectable from the printer Operator Control Panel if duplex is selected.
3
Used on HP LaserJet IIISi and 4Si printers only.
4
The font characteristics are determined by the default font. The default font can be the factory default font, the
user selected default font from the Operator Control Panel, or from a font cartridge with a default font.
Table 4-1. Factory Default Environment — PCL Context
4-2 Print Environment
FONTS 1
Symbol Set2,6 Roman-8
Spacing6Fixed
Pitch310 cpi
Height412 point
Style Upright
Stroke Weight Medium
Typeface6 Courier
UNDERLINING
Underlining Mode Off
CHARACTER TEXT PATH DIRECTION
Character Text Path Direction 0 (horizontal)
TEXT PARSING
Text Parsing Method50 or 31
FONT MANAGEMENT
Font ID 0
Character Code 0
Symbol Set ID 0
RASTER GRAPHICS
Presentation Mode 3 (Print image along the physical page
width)
Left Graphics Margin 0
Resolution 75 dpi
Compression Mode 0
Raster Height N/A
Raster Width Logical Page Width
1
The font characteristics are determined by the default font. The default font can be the factory default font, the user selected default font
from the Operator Control Panel, or from a font cartridge with a default font.
2
User can select default values from the printer’s Operator Control Panel for these feature settings.
3
Selectable from the front panel if a fixed-space scalable font was selected as the user default.
4
Selectable from the front panel if a proportional scalable font was selected as the user default.
5
If the default symbol set is WIN31J, the value is 31; otherwise, it is 0—only available on the LaserJet 4PJ, 4LJ Pro, and LaserJet 4V/4MV
printers if the ESC/P SIMM is installed. If the default symbol set is GB2312, the value is 38; otherwise it is 0.
6
For the LaserJet 4PJ and 4LJ Pro printers, the default symbol set is WIN31J, the default typeface is MS Mincho, and the default spacing is
proportional. For the LaserJet 4V/4MV printer, the default symbol set is Roman-8, default typeface is Courier, and spacing fixed;
Japanese customers must explicitly change the defaults if desired. For the LaserJet 4LC printer, the default symbol set is GB2312,
default typeface is Sim Sun, and the default spacing is proportional. For the LaserJet 5L, 5Si, 5SiMx, 6P, 6MP printers and the LaserJet 5Si
Mopier, the default symbol set is PC-8.
Table 4-1. Factory Default Environment — PCL Context (continued)
Print Environment 4-3
PRINT MODEL
Current Pattern Solid
Source Transparency Mode 0 (transparent)
Pattern Transparency Mode 0 (transparent)
Pattern Reference Point 0, 0
Logical Operation ROP 252
Pattern Rotation 0 (Pattern rotates with print direction)
RECTANGULAR AREA FILL
Horizontal Rectangle Size 0
Vertical Rectangle Size 0
Area Fill ID 0
PICTURE FRAME
Picture Frame Width Logical page width
Picture Frame Height Text length
Picture Frame Anchor Point PCL Cursor at left edge of the logical page
(top margin plus 75% of VMI)
HP-GL/2 Plot Horizontal Size Picture frame horizontal size
HP-GL/2 Plot Vertical Size Picture frame vertical size
MACRO
Macro ID 0
TROUBLESHOOTING
End-of-Line Wrap Off
Display Functions Off
STATUS READBACK
Current Location Type 0 - Invalid location
Current Location Unit 0 - All units
Table 4-1. Factory Default Environment — PCL Context (continued)
4-4 Print Environment
CHARACTER GROUP
Character Set Roman-8
Font Spacing Fixed
Pitch 10 cpi
Height 12 point
Posture Upright
Stroke Weight Medium
Typeface HP-GL/2 stick
Character Direction Horizontal
Character Direction Mode Absolute
Character Size Size transformation off
Character Size Mode Absolute
Character Slant 0
Extra Horizontal Space 0
Extra Vertical Space 0
Character Fill Mode Solidly filled, no edging
Label Origin 1
Label Terminator Etx
Transparent Data Mode Off
Primary Font ID 0
Secondary Font ID 0
Scalable or Bitmap Font Select scalable fonts only
VECTOR GROUP
Plotting Mode Absolute
Pen State Up
POLYGON GROUP
Polygon Buffer Cleared
Polygon Mode Off
Table 4-2. Factory Default Environment — HP-GL/2 Context
Print Environment 4-5
LINE AND FILL ATTRIBUTE GROUP
Line Type Solid
Line Type Repeat Length 4% of the diagonal distance from P1 to P2
Line Cap Butt
Line Join Mitered
Miter Limit 5
Pen Width 0.35mm
Pen Width Selection Mode Metric
Selected Pen No pen
Symbol Mode Off
Fill Type Solid (bi-directional)
User-defined Line Type Eight standard line types
Anchor Corner (0,0) Plotter units
User-defined Fill Types Solid fill
Transparency Mode On (transparent)
Screened Vector No screening
CONFIGURATION AND STATUS GROUP
Scale Mode Off
Window PCL default picture frame
(the PCL default logical page less 1/2 inch at
the top and the bottom)
Coordinate System Orientation Orientation of PCL default logical page
coordinate system
P1, P2 Lower left, upper right corners, respectively,
of picture frame
Table 4-2. Factory Default Environment — HP-GL/2 Context (continued)
4-6 Print Environment
Note Table 4-3 lists the User Default Environment. This print
environment is stored in non-volatile RAM (NVRAM),
which allows it to be retained in the event of a power cycle
(except for the HP LaserJet 4L, 5L, and 6L printers, which
do not contain NVRAM). In earlier printers without PJL,
the feature settings contained in the User Default Environ-
ment were selectable through the control panel only. In
newer printers with PJL, these feature settings can be set
from either the control panel (if the printer has one) or
through PJL or both.
The User Default Environment is reset to the Factory De-
fault Environment upon a cold reset.
Print Environment 4-7
Menu Item Range III IIID IIISi IIIP 4 4Si 4L 4ML,
4P, 4PJ,
4MP, 4LJ
Pro, 4LC
4 Plus,
4M Plus,
5P, 5MP
4V,
4MV
Copies 1* through 991 ✓✓✓✓
1-999 1-999 1-999 1-999 1-999 1-999
Orientation Portrait*, Land. ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Font Source Internal*, Cart-
ridge, Soft Fonts
✓✓✓✓ ✓
2✓
2✓✓ ✓2,3 ✓2✓2
Font Number 0* (Courier) to n ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
7✓✓
Pitch 410.00* .44 - 99.99 ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Point Size512.00* 4 - 999.75 ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Symbol Set Roman-8* ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
7✓ ✓
Form/Lines of
Text660* 5 - 128 ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
7✓ ✓
Paper (Job)
Size Letter*, Legal,
Executive, A4,
Com-10,
Monarch, DL, C5
✓✓no
C5
✓plus
B5 no
C5 plus
B5 plus B5
&
Custom6
plus
B5 plus
A3,
11x17and
more9
Manual Feed Off*, On ✓✓✓✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Duplex Off* (simplex),On ns ✓✓
ns ns ✓ns ns ✓8ns
Binding Long-edge*,
Short-edge ns ✓8 ✓8 ns ns ✓8 ns ns ✓8ns
Output Bin Upper*, Lower ns ns ✓ns ns ✓ns ns ns ns
Resolution
Enhancement Medium*, Light,
Dark, Off
✓✓✓✓ ✓ On/
Off
✓✓ ✓ ✓
Print Density 1, 2, 3*, 4, 5 ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓ ✓ ✓
EconoMode On, Off* ns ns ns ns ns ns ✓✓ ✓ ✓
Resource
Saving On, Off* ns ns ns ns ns ✓ns ns On,
Off,
Auto*
On, Off,
Auto*
✓
- Supported
*
- Default value (see Chapter 3 for list) ns - Not Supported
1
PCL range is 1 through 32767
2
SIMMs also available
3
The HP LaserJet 4L, 4ML, 4PJ, and 4MP printers do not accept cartridges.
4
Displayed for fixed-spaced scalable fonts only
5
Displayed for proportional scalable fonts only
6
Sets PCL text length
7
For LaserJet 4PJ and 4LJ Pro, WIN3.1J is the default symbol set and MS Mincho is default typeface; for the LaserJet 4LC, GB2312 is the
default symbol set and SimSun is the default typeface. A4 is default paper size, 64 is default lines of text; printer also supports JIS B5
paper, Hagaki and Oufuku-Hagaki postcards.
8
Supported if duplex is installed (duplex is an option on LaserJet 4 Plus and 4M Plus)
9
LaserJet 4V/4MV also supports JIS B5, JIS B4, JPOST, JPOSTD, Commercial B5, and Custom (11.7" x 17.7").
Table 4-3. User Default Environment
4-8 Print Environment
Menu Item Range 5L
6L 5, 5M
6P, 6MP 5Si
5SiMx
5Si Mopier
Color LaserJet DeskJet 1200C
DeskJet 1600C
Copies 1* through 9991 ✓✓
✓
✓
✓
Orientation Portrait*, Land. ✓✓
✓
✓✓
Font Source Internal*,
Cartridge,
Soft Fonts
✓ (no
cartridges) ✓ (no
cartridges) ✓ (no
cartridges)
✓✓
Font Number 0* (Courier) to n ✓✓✓✓✓
Pitch 210.00* .44 - 99.99 ✓✓✓✓ ✓
Point Size312.00* 4 - 999.75 ✓✓✓✓ ✓
Symbol Set Roman-8* PC-8* ✓PC-8* ✓ ✓
Form/Lines Text460* 5 - 128 ✓✓✓✓ ✓
Paper (Job) Size Letter*, Legal, plus A4,
Executive,
Envelopes
(Com-10,
Monarch,
C5, DL, B5)
Custom
(3" x 5" –
8.5" x 14")
plus A4, A5,
Executive,
Envelopes
(Com10,
Monarch, C5,
DL, B5)
(6P/6MP also
includes
Custom,
JISB5,
JPOST,
JPOSTD)
plus A4,
Executive,
A3, B4, B5,
Ledger (11"
x 17"),
Envelopes
(Com-10,
Monarch,
DL, C5, B5
plus A4,
11x17, A3,
Executive,
plus
COM10,
DL, C5
envelopes
Manual Feed Off*, On ✓✓✓✓✓
Duplex Off* (simplex),On ns 5/5M (option)
6P/6MP (ns)
✓ns ns
Binding Long-edge*,
Short-edge ns 5/5M (w/
duplex option)
✓ns ns
Output Bin
(Media Bin) Upper*, Lower ns ns ✓✓
ns
Resolution
Enhancement Medium*, Light,
Dark, Off, On On*, Off ✓On*, Off ✓✓
Print Density 1, 2, 3*, 4, 5 ✓✓✓✓✓
EconoMode On, Off* ✓✓✓✓✓
Resource
Saving On, Off* ns On, Off, Auto* On, Off,
Auto* On, Off,
Auto* On, Off,
Auto*
✓
- Supported
*
- Default value (see Chapter 2 for list) ns - Not Supported
1
PCL range is 1 through 32767
2
Displayed for fixed-spaced scalable fonts only.
3
Displayed for proportional scalable fonts only
4
Sets PCL text length
Table 4-3. User Default Environment (continued)
Print Environment 4-9
Menu Item Range 4000 series
Copies 1* through 9991 ✓
Orientation Portrait*, Land. ✓
Font Source Internal*,
Cartridge,
Soft Fonts
✓ (no
cartridges)
Font Number 0* (Courier) to n ✓
Pitch 210.00* .44 - 99.99 ✓
Point Size312.00* 4 - 999.75 ✓
Symbol Set Roman-8* ✓
Form/Lines Text460* 5 - 128 ✓
Paper (Job) Size Letter*, Legal, plus A4, A5,
B5, JIS-B5,
Executive,
Envelopes
(Com10,
Monarch, C5,
DL, B5)
Manual Feed Off*, On ✓
Duplex Off* (simplex),On option
Binding Long-edge*,
Short-edge (w/ duplex
option)
Output Bin
(Media Bin) Upper*, Lower ns
Resolution
Enhancement Medium*, Light,
Dark, Off, On
✓
Print Density 1, 2, 3*, 4, 5 ✓
EconoMode On, Off* ✓
Resource
Saving On, Off* On, Off, Auto*
✓
- Supported
*
- Default value (see Chapter 2 for list) ns - Not Supported
1
PCL range is 1 through 32767
2
Displayed for fixed-spaced scalable fonts only.
3
Displayed for proportional scalable fonts only
4
Sets PCL text length
Table 4-3. User Default Environment (continued)
4-10 Print Environment
5
Memory Usage
Introduction In some situations, the amount of available memory for
printing pages may be smaller than that required for
printing. To make more effective use of the available printer
memory, newer HP PCL 5 printers incorporate new
methods for managing memory. This smaller amount of
available memory is made more usable by:
Memory Enhancement technology, MEt, (available on all
HP LaserJet 6, LaserJet 5, and LaserJet 4 family
printers except the 4, 4M, 4Si and 4SiMx)
Adaptive Data Compression, ADC, (available on HP
LaserJet 4, 4M, 4Si, 4SiMx and DeskJet 1200C printers)
Following recommended practices for transmitting data,
especially raster graphics, to the printer
For the HP LaserJet 4L, using Raster Graphics Adaptive
Compression (PCL compression mode five)
All HP LaserJet 4, 5 and 6 family printers have internal
programming for optimizing the use of limited memory. HP
LaserJet 4, 4M, 4Si, 4SiMx, and DeskJet 1200C printers
compress raster graphics data using a system called
Adaptive Data Compression or ADC. The other HP
LaserJet 4 / 5 / 6 printers use MEt to compress not only
raster graphics data, but also to compress fonts, improve
memory usage for page protection, and provide an overall
improvement in memory efficiency. Both systems operate
automatically and without any intervention from the user.
The HP Color LaserJet printer has memory management
features similar to MEt, but has additional features for
color processing.
Memory Usage 5-1
Operation of ADC
and MEt The goal of ADC is to automatically and transparently
reduce Memory Out errors caused by raster graphics pages.
MEt extends this goal to reducing all Memory Out errors
and eliminating Print Overrun errors.
During the printing of a page, if available printer memory
becomes low, all HP LaserJet 4, 5, and 6 family printers
and the HP Color LaserJet printer have the ability to
automatically compress any already-stored raster graphics
data using a variety of compression techniques. This allows
the printing of many raster graphics pages which would
have caused a Memory Out error on previous HP LaserJet
printers having the same amount of memory.
With ADC or MEt, PCL 5 printers can typically print a full
page of raster graphics in base memory without a memory
out. This is especially true for line art and typical business
graphics. Other types of graphics such as scanned
photographs (especially if a technique called error-diffusion
is used), cannot always be printed as easily by ADC or MEt
as can line art graphics. Fortunately, another internal
printer feature, Image Adapt, can be called upon to make
the page fit in memory.
Image Adapt Image Adapt is only used as a last resort for compressing
raster graphics data and as such will rarely be seen. It
reduces a raster graphic image to one-fourth its original
size by trading off some of the image’s fine detail. This loss
of fine detail is often not noticeable.
Image Adapt can be disabled on some of the HP LaserJet 4,
5, and 6 family printers if required, but the technique
varies. On the HP LaserJet 4, 4M and 4Si the user will
have to add more memory to effectively remove the need for
Image Adapt. Image Adapt can be disabled on some of the
other HP LaserJet 4, 5, and 6 family printers by using a
PJL command (refer to the respective printer user manuals
for further information—the Color LaserJet printer does
not utilize Image Adapt). If Image Adapt is turned off, more
pages will cause Memory Out errors.
5-2 Memory Usage
All HP LaserJet 4, 5, and 6 family printers also include
enhancements to improve the internal storage of raster
graphics data.
Additional MEt
Features With MEt, font data can also be compressed. All
downloaded bitmap characters and characters scaled from
internal or downloaded scalable outlines can be
compressed. The amount of memory savings varies with the
size of the characters involved (larger is better) but
character sizes can typically be cut in half. This allows
roughly twice as many fonts to be downloaded or scaled
using a MEt-enhanced LaserJet printer as previously
allowed on printers without MEt.
In prior PCL 5 printers, if the page could not be rendered as
fast as the laser printed it, a Print Overrun error occurred
unless page protection was manually turned on and
memory was added to accommodate it. With MEt, the
manual setting of Page Protection and the additional
memory required to facilitate it is obsolete. MEt
automatically assesses the complexity of the page being
printed and if too complex turns on a new form of page
protection which uses compression to remove the
requirement for additional memory.
In rare circumstances MEt’s assessment of the page may
prove to be incorrect. For these cases there is some amount
of control over this Page Protection process depending upon
which MEt-equipped printer is being used. Page Protection
may be explicitly turned on or off to avoid the complexity
assessment and either always or never perform the page
protection process. See the appropriate user manual for
details.
MEt also includes other internal memory-saving techniques
which improve the amount of memory required for the
printer’s internal representation of your page.
Memory Usage 5-3
ADC and MEt Notes For raster graphics compression to perform at its best it is
recommended that the “Recommendations For Sending
Data to the Printer,” described below, be followed.
Character bitmaps can only be compressed if they can be
stored uncompressed in contiguous printer memory first.
This requirement implies that large point size characters
may require more printer memory than would seem
necessary.
During MEt’s Page Protection, portions of the internal
representation of the page are discarded to make room for
other aspects of the page protection process. If a memory
out condition occurs during this process (unlikely, but
possible) a white band will be seen on the page. The best
way to remedy this situation is to add memory to the
printer.
Recommendations
For Sending Data to
the Printer
The HP PCL 5 printers perform best in terms of speed and
memory utilization if the recommendations made below are
followed. Failure to follow these recommendations will not
harm the printer, but may increase the chances of a
memory out condition or increase the time to print a page.
Ordered Images — Raster Graphic images or pictures
should be sent from top to bottom with the data in one
band (start raster, end raster pair). If one band is not
possible, as few as possible multiple bands may be used
as long as they exactly follow each other and are sent in
top-to-bottom order. Also, multiple bands should be as
large as possible.
Band Sizes — If an image is sent in bands (start raster,
end raster pairs), the bands should be multiples of 32
lines high. This is especially critical for landscape
graphics. If there is no way to send multiples of 32-line
high bands, multiples of four for band height should be
used. This allows Image Adapt to work better.
5-4 Memory Usage
Avoid Non-Raster Commands — During the
transmission of sequential raster bands non-raster
commands should be avoided. This includes cursor
positioning commands.
Separation of Images — If more than one image or
picture is to be printed on a page, it is best to keep them
separate. Separation consists of assuring that the new
image starts with a new start raster command and that
the one image does not exactly follow the next image
(separate the image by at least one line vertically and
sixteen pixels horizontally). This constraint improves the
operation of Image Adapt.
Rectangular Images — All HP LaserJet 4 family
printers perform best if raster images are sent as
rectangular images to the printer. This entails keeping
the right margin of the image constant and keeping all
lines the full image width (no lines are truncated). Also,
avoid skipping lines. When whole blank lines appear in
the image, either send zeroed data row(s) or use the
Raster Y-Offset command.
Avoid Unnecessary Print Model Use — Print model
modes, other than source and pattern transparent,
degrade memory efficiency. (This restriction is not true
for the HP Color LaserJet printer.) For best results do
not use an opaque source unless there is an image known
to already be on the page in the same area. Following the
other rules listed in this section minimizes the impact of
using non-transparent print model modes.
Avoid Tall, Narrow Images — For ADC, images which
are taller than they are wide by more than eight to one
disable the printer’s ability to automatically separate
images upon the page (this restriction is not true for the
HP Color LaserJet printer). This violation is desirable in
the case where the above rules are violated and multiple
images are rendered as one image and sent to the printer
as one combined image. Sending raster data as a
checkerboard with non-full width bands sent left to right
and top to bottom also disables the printer’s automatic
Memory Usage 5-5
image separation. In general, for all HP LaserJet
printers, tall, narrow images should be avoided since
they typically require more memory.
Wide Patterns — Patterns can use up a lot of
memory— avoid them if possible. Avoid patterns which,
in their final orientation, are not 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 or 32 (32 is
for all but the 4L) bits wide. Patterns of other sizes will
be tiled out to the full width of the page and can consume
a large amount of memory (since the HP Color LaserJet
printer does not perform this way, it is not a factor for
this printer). Note that a landscape pattern that is 16
wide by 5 high would become 5 wide by 16 high when
rotated and be subjected to being tiled across the page.
Avoid Unnecessary Pattern Selection — In HP-GL/2,
avoid issuing redundant Fill Type (FT) and Line Type
(LT) commands. These commands may cause patterns to
be rebuilt and tiled for each invocation.
Avoid Many Small Polygons — In HP-GL/2 avoid
entering and exiting polygon mode repeatedly as it
fragments memory. If possible send down fewer, larger
polygons.
Download Font Characters as Needed — All PCL 5
printers operate best if fonts and outlines downloaded do
not include information for characters which are not
used upon the current page. It is also best to download
bitmap characters in the orientation which they will be
used.
Note When deleting font characters and patterns, remember that
if a pattern or font character is used on the current page,
any deletion commands affecting it will not be executed
until the page is printed.
5-6 Memory Usage
Raster Graphics
Adaptive
Compression
(Method 5)
Raster Graphics Adaptive Compression (Set Compression
Method Command, mode 5) is implemented on the HP
LaserJet IIIP, Color LaserJet, all LaserJet 4, 5, and 6
family printers, and the DeskJet 1200C and 1600C printers.
This compression method allows the host to compress data
using a combination of PCL compression modes to obtain
optimum compression (refer to the PCL 5 Printer Language
Technical Reference manual, Set Compression Method
Command, for details).
An added benefit of this method for the HP LaserJet 4L and
LaserJet IIIP printers is that the data is not decompressed
upon entry to the printer provided the image is portrait,
300 dpi, transparent print model and no patterns are being
used. This allows the LaserJet 4L and IIIP to print many
pages which would otherwise require more memory. As an
added benefit these pages print faster. The other HP
LaserJet 4, 5, and 6 family printers decompress the data
upon entry to the printer and rely upon ADC or MEt to
compress the data if required.
For the HP LaserJet 4L printer it is critical that the image
actually compress (not expand) if Adaptive Compression is
used since MEt does not operate upon images meeting the
requirements for delayed decompression.
Memory Usage 5-7
5-8 Memory Usage
A
Printer Commands
Introduction This appendix lists HP printer language commands. Table
A-1 lists PCL 5 commands in hierarchical order and gives
the decimal and hexadecimal equivalents of each. Table A-2
lists HP-GL/2 commands, where as Table A-3 lists control
codes.
Note Values in parentheses “(x)” identify the lower case of the
termination character which is used for combining
commands.
Printer Commands A-1
FUNCTION PARAMETER COMMAND DECIMAL VALUE HEXADECIMAL VALUE
JOB CONTROL COMMANDS
Reset
Configuration
(AppleTalk) Key/Value data
pair ?&b#W[data] 027 038 098 #...# 87 1B 26 62 #...# 57
Universal Exit
Language (ULE) —?%–12345X 027 037 045 049 050 051 052 053 088 1B 25 2D 31 32 33 34 35 58
Reset — ?E 027 069 1B 45
Number of Copies # of Copies ?&l#X (x) 027 038 108 #...# 088 (120) 1B 26 6C #...# 58 (78)
Simplex/Duplex
Print Simplex ?&l0S(s) 027 038 108 048 083 (115) 1B 26 6C 30 53 (73)
Duplex
Long Edge
Binding ?&l1S (s) 027 038 108 049 083 (115) 1B 26 6C 31 53 (73)
Short Edge
Binding ?&l2S (s) 027 038 108 050 083 (115) 1B 26 6C 32 53 (73)
Long-Edge (Left) Offset
Registration # of Decipoints
(1/720") ?&l#U (u) 027 038 108 #...# 085 (117) 1B 26 6C #...# 55 (75)
Short-Edge (Top) Offset
Registration # of Decipoints
(1/720") ?&l#Z (z) 027 038 108 #...# 090 (122) 1B 26 6C #...# 5A (7A)
Page Side Selection Next Side ?&a0G(g) 027 038 097 048 071 (103) 1B 26 61 30 47 (67)
Front Side ?&a1G (g) 027 038 097 049 071 (103) 1B 26 61 31 47 (67)
Back Side ?&a2G (g) 027 038 097 050 071 (103) 1B 26 61 32 47 (67)
Job Separation — ?&l1T (t) 027 038 108 049 084 (116) 1B 26 6C 31 54 (74)
Output (Media) Bin Automatic selection ?&l0G (g) 027 038 108 048 071 (103) 1B 26 6C 30 47 (67)
Selection Upper Output Bin
(Bin #1) ?&l1G (g) 027 038 108 049 071 (103) 1B 26 6C 31 47 (67)
Rear Output Bin1
(Bin #2) ?&l2G (g) 027 038 108 050 071 (103) 1B 26 6C 32 47 (67)
Selects Bin #3 ?&l3G (g) 027 038 108 051 071 (103) 1B 26 6C 33 47 (67)
Selects Bin #4 ?&l4G (g) 027 038 108 052 071 (103) 1B 26 6C 34 47 (67)
Selects Bin #5 ?&l5G (g) 027 038 108 053 071 (103) 1B 26 6C 35 47 (67)
Selects Bin #6 ?&l6G (g) 027 038 108 054 071 (103) 1B 26 6C 36 47 (67)
Selects Bin #7 ?&l7G (g) 027 038 108 055 071 (103) 1B 26 6C 37 47 (67)
Selects Bin #8 ?&l8G (g) 027 038 108 056 071 (103) 1B 26 6C 38 47 (67)
Selects Bin #9 ?&l9G (g) 027 038 108 057 071 (103) 1B 26 6C 39 47 (67)
Selects Bin #10 ?&l10G (g) 027 038 108 049 048 071 (103) 1B 26 6C 31 30 47 (67)
Selects Bin #11 ?&l11G (g) 027 038 108 049 049 071 (103) 1B 26 6C 31 31 47 (67)
1
For HP LaserJet 5Si/5SiMx printers,
?&l2G
selects the “printer left/face up bin,” which is not available when the High Capacity Output
(HCO) is attached.
Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands
A-2 Printer Commands
FUNCTION PARAMETER COMMAND DECIMAL VALUE HEXADECIMAL VALUE
Unit of
Measure # Number of units
per inch ?&u#D (d) 027 038 117 #...# 068 (100) 1B 26 75 #...# 44 (64)
Mechanical Print
Quality Normal ?*o0Q (q) 027 042 111 048 081 (113) 1B 2A 6F 30 51 (71)
Better ?*o1Q (q) 027 042 111 049 081 (113) 1B 2A 6F 31 51 (71)
Best ?*o2Q (q) 027 042 111 050 081 (113) 1B 2A 6F 32 51 (71)
Media Type Plain ?&l0M (m) 027 038 108 048 077 (109) 1B 26 6C 30 4D (6D)
Bond ?&l1M (m) 027 038 108 049 077 (109) 1B 26 6C 31 4D (6D)
Special ?&l2M (m) 027 038 108 050 077 (109) 1B 26 6C 32 4D (6D)
Glossy ?&l3M (m) 027 038 108 051 077 (109) 1B 26 6C 33 4D (6D)
Transparency ?&l4M (m) 027 038 108 052 077 (109) 1B 26 6C 34 4D (6D)
Negative Motion Contains negative
motion ?&a0N (n) 027 038 097 048 078 (110) 1B 26 61 30 4E (6E)
Does not contain
negative motion ?&a1N (n) 027 038 097 049 078 (110) 1B 26 61 31 4E (6E)
PAGE CONTROL COMMANDS
Page Length and Size
Paper Source Eject Page ?&l0H(h) 027 038 108 048 072 (104) 1B 26 6C 30 48 (68)
Main Paper Source ?&l1H (h) 027 038 108 049 072 (104) 1B 26 6C 31 48 (68)
Manual Feed ?&l2H (h) 027 038 108 050 072 (104) 1B 26 6C 32 48 (68)
Manual Envelope
Feed ?&l3H (h) 027 038 108 051 072 (104) 1B 26 6C 33 48 (68)
Alternate Paper
Source ?&l4H (h) 027 038 108 052 072 (104) 1B 26 6C 34 48 (68)
Optional Large
Paper Source ?&l5H (h) 027 038 108 053 072 (104) 1B 26 6C 35 48 (68)
Envelope Feeder ?&l6H (h) 027 038 108 054 072 (104) 1B 26 6C 36 48 (68)
Auto Select ?&l7H (h) 027 038 108 055 072 (104) 1B 26 6C 37 48 (68)
Tray 1 (right tray) ?&l8H (h) 027 038 108 056 072 (104) 1B 26 6C 38 48 (68)
Page Size Executive ?&l1A (a) 027 038 108 049 065 (97) 1B 26 6C 31 41 (61)
Letter ?&l2A (a) 027 038 108 050 065 (97) 1B 26 6C 32 41 (61)
Legal ?&l3A (a) 027 038 108 051 065 (97) 1B 26 6C 33 41 (61)
Ledger ?&l6A (a) 027 038 108 054 065 (97) 1B 26 6C 36 41 (61)
A3 ?&l27A (a) 027 038 108 050 055 065 (97) 1B 26 6C 32 37 41 (61)
A4 ?&l26A (a) 027 038 108 050 054 065 (97) 1B 26 6C 32 36 41 (61)
A5 ?&l25A (a) 027 038 108 050 053 065 (97) 1B 26 6C 32 35 41 (61)
A6 ?&l24A (a) 027 038 108 050 052 065 (97) 1B 26 6C 32 34 41 (61)
JIS B4 Paper ?&l46A (a) 027 038 108 052 054 065 (97) 1B 26 6C 34 36 41 (61)
JIS B5 Paper ?&l45A (a) 027 038 108 052 053 065 (97) 1B 26 6C 34 35 41 (61)
JIS B6 Paper ?&l44A (a) 027 038 108 052 052 065 (97) 1B 26 6C 34 34 41 (61)
Hagaki Postcard ?&l71A (a) 027 038 108 055 049 065 (97) 1B 26 6C 37 31 41 (61)
Oufuku-Hagaki ?&l72A (a) 027 038 108 055 050 065 (97) 1B 26 6C 37 32 41 (61)
Monarch Envelope ?&l80A(a) 027 038 108 056 048 065 (97) 1B 26 6C 38 30 41 (61)
COM 10 Envelope ?&l81A (a) 027 038 108 056 049 065 (97) 1B 26 6C 38 31 41 (61)
DL Envelope ?&l90A(a) 027 038 108 057 048 065 (97) 1B 26 6C 39 30 41 (61)
C5 Envelope ?&l91A (a) 027 038 108 057 049 065 (97) 1B 26 6C 39 31 41 (61)
B5 Envelope ?&l100A (a) 027 038 108 049 048 048 065 (97) 1B 26 6C 31 30 30 41 (61)
Custom ?&l101A (a) 027 038 108 049 048 049 065 (97) 1B 26 6C 31 30 31 41 (61)
Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)
Printer Commands A-3
FUNCTION PARAMETER COMMAND DECIMAL VALUE HEXADECIMAL VALUE
Orientation
Orientation Portrait ?&l0O(o) 027 038 108 048 079 (111) 1B 26 6C 30 4F (6F)
Landscape ?&l1O (o) 027 038 108 049 079 (111) 1B 26 6C 31 4F (6F)
Reverse Portrait ?&l2O (o) 027 038 108 050 079 (111) 1B 26 6C 32 4F (6F)
Reverse
Landscape ?&l3O (o) 027 038 108 051 079 (111) 1B 26 6C 33 4F (6F)
Print Direction # Degrees of
Rotation (counter-
clockwise,
90° increments
only)
?&a#P (p) 027 038 097 #...# 080 (112) 1B 26 61 #...# 50 (70)
Character Text
Path Direction Horizontal
Vertical Rotated ?&c0T
?&c–1T
(t)
(t) 027 038 099 048 084
027 038 099 045 049 084 (116)
(116)
1B 26 63 30 54
1B 26 63 2D 31 54 (74)
(74)
Margins and Text Length
Top Margin # of Lines ?&l#E (e) 027 038 108 #...# 069 (101) 1B 26 6C #...# 45 (65)
Text Length # of Lines ?&l#F (f) 027 038 108 #...# 070 (102) 1B 26 6C #...# 46 (66)
Left Margin # of Columns ?&a#L (l) 027 038 097 #...# 076 (108) 1B 26 61 #...# 4C (6C)
Right Margin # of Columns ?&a#M (m) 027 038 097 #...# 077 (109) 1B 26 61 #...# 4D (6D)
Clear Horizontal
Margins —?9 027 057 1B 39
Perforation Skip Mode
Perforation Skip Disable ?&l0L(l) 027 038 108 048 076 (108) 1B 26 6C 30 4C (6C)
Enable ?&l1L (l) 027 038 108 049 076 (108) 1B 26 6C 31 4C (6C)
Horizontal Column Spacing
Horizontal Motion
Index (HMI) # of 1/120"
Increments ?&k#H (h) 027 038 107 #...# 072 (104) 1B 26 6B #...# 48 (68)
Vertical Line Spacing
Vertical Motion In-
dex (VMI) # of 1/48"
Increments ?&l#C (c) 027 038 108 #...# 067 (99) 1B 26 6C #...# 43 (63)
Line Spacing
(Lines per inch) 1 line/inch ?&l1D (d) 027 038 108 049 068 (100) 1B 26 6C 31 44 (64)
2 lines/inch ?&l2D (d) 027 038 108 050 068 (100) 1B 26 6C 32 44 (64)
3 lines/inch ?&l3D (d) 027 038 108 051 068 (100) 1B 26 6C 33 44 (64)
4 lines/inch ?&l4D (d) 027 038 108 052 068 (100) 1B 26 6C 34 44 (64)
6 lines/inch ?&l6D (d) 027 038 108 054 068 (100) 1B 26 6C 36 44 (64)
8 lines/inch ?&l8D (d) 027 038 108 056 068 (100) 1B 26 6C 38 44 (64)
12 lines/inch ?&l12D (d) 027 038 108 049 050 068 (100) 1B 26 6C 31 32 44 (64)
16 lines/inch ?&l16D (d) 027 038 108 049 054 068 (100) 1B 26 6C 31 36 44 (64)
24 lines/inch ?&l24D (d) 027 038 108 050 052 068 (100) 1B 26 6C 32 34 44 (64)
48 lines/inch ?&l48D (d) 027 038 108 052 056 068 (100) 1B 26 6C 34 38 44 (64)
ALPHANUMERIC ID
Alphanumeric ID # of bytes ?&n#W[operation]
[String] 027 038 110 #...# 087 1B 26 6E #...# 57
Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)
A-4 Printer Commands
FUNCTION PARAMETER COMMAND DECIMAL VALUE HEXADECIMAL VALUE
CURSOR POSITIONING
Vertical and Horizontal
Vertical Position # of Rows ?&a#R (r) 027 038 097 #...# 082 (114) 1B 26 61 #...# 52 (72)
# of Units ?*p#Y (y) 027 042 112 #...# 089 (121) 1B 2A 70 #...# 59 (79)
# of Decipoints ?&a#V (v) 027 038 097 #...# 086 (118) 1B 26 61 #...# 56 (76)
Horizontal Position # of Columns ?&a#C (c) 027 038 097 #...# 067 (99) 1B 26 61 #...# 43 (63)
# of Units ?*p#X (x) 027 042 112 #...# 088 (120) 1B 2A 70 #...# 58 (78)
# of Decipoints ?&a#H (h) 027 038 097 #...# 072 (104) 1B 26 61 #...# 48 (68)
Half Line Feed ?= 027 061 1B 3D
End-of-Line Termination
Line Termination CR=CR; LF=LF; FF=FF ?&k0G (g) 027 038 107 048 071 (103) 1B 26 6B 30 47 (67)
CR=CR+LF; LF=LF; FF=FF ?&k1G (g) 027 038 107 049 071 (103) 1B 26 6B 31 47 (67)
CR=CR; LF=CR+LF; FF=CR+FF ?&k2G (g) 027 038 107 050 071 (103) 1B 26 6B 32 47 (67)
CR=CR+LF; LF=CR+LF; FF=CR+FF ?&k3G (g) 027 038 107 051 071 (103) 1B 26 6B 33 47 (67)
Push/Pop Position
Push/Pop Position Push ?&f0S (s) 027 038 102 048 083 (115) 1B 26 66 30 53 (73)
Pop ?&f1S (s) 027 038 102 049 083 (115) 1B 26 66 31 53 (73)
FONT SELECTION
Symbol Set Selection
1
Primary Symbol Set ISO 60: Norwegian 1 ?(0D 027 040 048 068 1B 28 30 44
ISO 4: United Kingdom ?(1E 027 040 049 069 1B 28 31 45
Windows 3.1 Latin 2 ?(9E 027 040 057 069 1B 28 39 45
ISO 69: French ?(1F 027 040 049 070 1B 28 31 46
ISO 21: German ?(1G 027 040 049 071 1B 28 31 47
ISO 15: Italian ?(0I 027 040 048 073 1B 28 30 49
Microsoft Publishing ?(6J 027 040 054 074 1B 28 36 4A
1
Additional symbol sets are supported, refer to Table C-1 for a list of these symbol sets.
Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)
Printer Commands A-5
FUNCTION PARAMETER COMMAND DECIMAL VALUE HEXADECIMAL VALUE
Symbol Set Selection
1
- continued
Primary Symbol Set DeskTop ?(7J 027 040 055 074 1B 28 37 4A
PS Text ?(10J 027 040 049 048 074 1B 28 31 30 4A
MC Text ?(12J 027 040 049 050 074 1B 28 31 32 4A
Ventura International ?(13J 027 040 049 051 074 1B 28 31 33 4A
Ventura US ?(14J 027 040 049 052 074 1B 28 31 34 4A
Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats ?(9L 027 040 057 076 1B 28 39 4C
PS ITC Zapf Dingbats ?(10L 027 040 049 048 076 1B 28 31 30 4C
ITC Zapf Dingbats Series 100 ?(11L 027 040 049 049 076 1B 28 31 31 4C
ITC Zapf Dingbats Series 200 ?(12L 027 040 049 050 076 1B 28 31 32 4C
ITC Zapf Dingbats Series 300 ?(13L 027 040 049 051 076 1B 28 31 33 4C
Wingdings ?(579L 027 040 053 055 057 076 1B 28 35 37 39 4C
PS Math ?(5M 027 040 053 077 1B 28 35 4D
Ventura Math ?(6M 027 040 054 077 1B 28 36 4D
Math-8 ?(8M 027 040 056 077 1B 28 38 4D
Symbol ?(19M 027 040 049 057 077 1B 28 31 39 4D
ISO 8859-1 (ECMA-94) Latin 1 ?(0N 027 040 048 078 1B 28 30 4E
ISO 8859-2: Latin 2 ?(2N 027 040 050 078 1B 28 32 4E
ISO 8859-9: Latin 5 ?(5N 027 040 053 078 1B 28 35 4E
ISO 11: Swedish ?(0S 027 040 048 083 1B 28 30 53
ISO 17: Spanish ?(2S 027 040 050 083 1B 28 32 53
Windows 3.1 Latin 5 ?(5T 027 040 053 084 1B 28 35 54
PC 1004 ?(9J 027 040 057 074 1B 28 39 4A
PC 775 ?(26U 027 040 050 054 085 1B 28 32 36 55
Windows Baltic ?(19L 027 040 049 076 1B 28 31 4C
ISO 8859-10: Latin 6 ?(6N 027 040 054 078 1B 28 36 4E
1
Additional symbol sets are supported, refer to Table C-1 for a list of these symbol sets.
Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)
A-6 Printer Commands
FUNCTION PARAMETER COMMAND DECIMAL VALUE HEXADECIMAL VALUE
Symbol Set Selection
1
- continued
Primary Symbol Set PC Turkish ?(9T 027 040 057 084 1B 28 39 54
ISO 6: ASCII ?(0U 027 040 048 085 1B 28 30 55
Legal ?(1U 027 040 049 085 1B 28 31 55
Roman-8 ?(8U 027 040 056 085 1B 28 38 55
Windows 3.0 Latin 1 ?(9U 027 040 057 085 1B 28 39 55
PC-8 ?(10U 027 040 049 048 085 1B 28 31 30 55
PC-8 D/N ?(11U 027 040 049 049 085 1B 28 31 31 55
PC-850 ?(12U 027 040 049 050 085 1B 28 31 32 55
Pi Font ?(15U 027 040 049 053 085 1B 28 31 35 55
PC-852 ?(17U 027 040 049 055 085 1B 28 31 37 55
Windows 3.1 Latin 1 (ANSI) ?(19U 027 040 049 057 085 1B 28 31 39 55
Windows 3.1J(Japanese) ?(19K 027 040 049 057 075 1B 28 31 39 4B
Spacing
Primary Spacing Fixed ?(s0P(p) 027 040 115 048 080 (112) 1B 28 73 30 50 (70)
Proportional ?(s1P (p) 027 040 115 049 080 (112) 1B 28 73 31 50 (70)
Pitch
Primary Pitch # Characters/inch ?(s#H (h) 027 040 115 #...# 072 (104) 1B 28 73 #...# 48 (68)
Set Pitch Mode 10.0 ?&k0S (s) 027 038 107 048 083 (115) 1B 26 6B 30 53 (73)
Compressed (16.5-16.7) ?&k2S (s) 027 038 107 050 083 (115) 1B 26 6B 32 53 (73)
Elite (12.0) ?&k4S (s) 027 038 107 052 083 (115) 1B 26 6B 34 53 (73)
Point Size
Primary Height # Points ?(s#V (v) 027 040 115 #...# 086 (118) 1B 28 73 #...# 56 (76)
1
Additional symbol sets are supported, refer to Table C-1 for a list of these symbol sets.
Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)
Printer Commands A-7
FUNCTION PARAMETER COMMAND DECIMAL VALUE HEXADECIMAL VALUE
Style
Primary Style Upright (Solid) ?(s0S(s) 027 040 115 048 083 (115) 1B 28 73 30 53 (73)
Italic ?(s1S (s) 027 040 115 049 083 (115) 1B 28 73 31 53 (73)
Condensed ?(s4S (s) 027 040 115 052 083 (115) 1B 28 73 34 53 (73)
Condensed Italic ?(s5S (s) 027 040 115 053 083 (115) 1B 28 73 35 53 (73)
Compressed (Extra Condensed) ?(s8S (s) 027 040 115 056 083 (115) 1B 28 73 38 53 (73)
Expanded ?(s24S (s) 027 040 115 050 052 083 (115) 1B 28 73 32 34 53 (73)
Outline ?(s32S (s) 027 040 115 051 050 083 (115) 1B 28 73 33 32 53 (73)
Inline ?(s64S (s) 027 040 115 054 052 083 (115) 1B 28 73 36 34 53 (73)
Shadowed ?(s128S (s) 027 040 115 049 050 056 083 (115) 1B 28 73 31 32 38 53 (73)
Outline Shadowed ?(s160S(s) 027 040 115 049 054 048 083 (115) 1B 28 73 31 36 30 53 (73)
Additional style values may be obtained from the related documentation provided with HP’s font products.
PCL 5 LaserJet Printers allows the specification of complex structures (contours, outlines, shading, etc.) and widths as well as posture.
Refer to the PCL 5 Printer Language Technical Reference Manual.
Stroke Weight
Primary Font
Stroke Weight Ultra Thin ?(s–7B (b) 027 040 115 045 055 066 (98) 1B 28 73 2D 37 42 (62)
Extra Thin ?(s–6B (b) 027 040 115 045 054 066 (98) 1B 28 73 2D 36 42 (62)
Thin ?(s–5B (b) 027 040 115 045 053 066 (98) 1B 28 73 2D 35 42 (62)
Extra Light ?(s–4B (b) 027 040 115 045 052 066 (98) 1B 28 73 2D 34 42 (62)
Light ?(s–3B (b) 027 040 115 045 051 066 (98) 1B 28 73 2D 33 42 (62)
Demi Light ?(s–2B (b) 027 040 115 045 050 066 (98) 1B 28 73 2D 32 42 (62)
Semi Light ?(s–1B (b) 027 040 115 045 049 066 (98) 1B 28 73 2D 31 42 (62)
Medium (book or text) ?(s0B(b) 027 040 115 048 066 (98) 1B 28 73 30 42 (62)
Semi Bold ?(s1B (b) 027 040 115 049 066 (98) 1B 28 73 31 42 (62)
Demi Bold ?(s2B (b) 027 040 115 050 066 (98) 1B 28 73 32 42 (62)
Bold ?(s3B (b) 027 040 115 051 066 (98) 1B 28 73 33 42 (62)
Extra Bold ?(s4B (b) 027 040 115 052 066 (98) 1B 28 73 34 42 (62)
Black ?(s5B (b) 027 040 115 053 066 (98) 1B 28 73 35 42 (62)
Extra Black ?(s6B (b) 027 040 115 054 066 (98) 1B 28 73 36 42 (62)
Ultra Black ?(s7B (b) 027 040 115 055 066 (98) 1B 28 73 37 42 (62)
Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)
A-8 Printer Commands
FUNCTION PARAMETER COMMAND DECIMAL VALUE HEXADECIMAL VALUE
Primary Typeface Family
1
Typeface Family LinePrinter ?(s0T(t) 027 040 115 048 084 (116) 1B 28 73 30 54 (74)
Albertus ?(s4362T (t) 027 040 115 052 051 054 050 084 (116) 1B 28 73 34 33 36 32 54 (74)
Antique Olive ?(s4168T (t) 027 040 115 052 049 054 056 084 (116) 1B 28 73 34 31 36 38 54 (74)
Clarendon ?(s4140T (t) 027 040 115 052 049 052 048 084 (116) 1B 28 73 34 31 34 30 54 (74)
Coronet ?(s4116T (t) 027 040 115 052 049 049 054 084 (116) 1B 28 73 34 31 31 36 54 (74)
Courier ?(s3T (t) 027 040 115 051 084 (116) 1B 28 73 33 54 (74)
GW-Kai ?(s37357T (t) 027 040 115 051 055 051 053 055 084 (116) 1B 28 73 33 37 33 35 37 54 (74)
Courier ?(s4099T (t) 027 040 115 052 048 057 057 084 (116) 1B 28 73 34 30 39 39 54 (74)
ITC Zapf Dingbats ?(s4141T (t) 027 040 115 052 049 052 049 084 (116) 1B 28 73 34 31 34 31 54 (74)
Garamond Antiqua ?(s4197T (t) 027 040 115 052 049 057 055 084 (116) 1B 28 73 34 31 39 37 54 (74)
Letter Gothic ?(s4102T (t) 027 040 115 052 049 048 050 084 (116) 1B 28 73 34 31 30 32 54 (74)
Marigold ?(s4297T (t) 027 040 115 052 050 057 055 084 (116) 1B 28 73 34 32 39 37 54 (74)
CG Omega ?(s4113T (t) 027 040 115 052 049 049 051 084 (116) 1B 28 73 34 31 31 33 54 (74)
CG Times ?(s4101T (t) 027 040 115 052 049 048 049 084 (116) 1B 28 73 34 31 30 31 54 (74)
Univers ?(s4148T (t) 027 040 115 052 049 052 056 084 (116) 1B 28 73 34 31 34 38 54 (74)
Arial ?(s16602T (t) 027 040 115 049 054 054 048 050 084 (116) 1B 28 73 31 36 36 30 32 54 (74)
MS Mincho ?(s28752T (t) 027 040 115 050 056 055 053 050 084 (116) 1B 28 73 32 38 37 35 32 54 (74)
MS Gothic ?(s28825T (t) 027 040 115 050 056 056 050 053 084 (116) 1B 28 73 32 38 38 32 35 54 (74)
Times New Roman ?(s16901T (t) 027 040 115 049 054 057 048 049 084 (116) 1B 28 73 31 36 39 30 31 54 (74)
SimHei ?(s37110T (t) 027 040 115 051 055 049 049 048 084 (116) 1B 28 73 33 37 31 31 30 54 (74)
SimSun ?(s37058T (t) 027 040 115 051 055 048 053 056 084 (116) 1B 28 73 33 37 30 35 38 54 (74)
Symbol ?(s16686T (t) 027 040 115 049 054 054 056 054 084 (116) 1B 28 73 31 36 36 38 36 54 (74)
Wingdings ?(s6826T (t) 027 040 115 054 056 050 054 084 (116) 1B 28 73 36 38 32 36 54 (74)
Wingdings ?(s31402T (t) 027 040 115 051 049 052 048 050 084 (116) 1B 28 73 33 31 34 30 32 54 (74)
FONT DEFAULT
Font Default Primary Font ?(3@ 027 040 051 064 1B 28 33 40
Secondary Font ?)3@ 027 041 051 064 1B 29 33 40
UNDERLINE
Underline Enable Fixed ?&d0D (d) 027 038 100 048 068 (100) 1B 26 64 30 44 (64)
Enable Floating ?&d3D (d) 027 038 100 051 068 (100) 1B 26 64 33 44 (64)
Disable ?&d@ 027 038 100 064 1B 26 64 40
TEXT PARSING METHOD
Text Parsing Method 1-Byte
1-Byte
1-Byte/2-Byte
1-Byte/2-Byte
1-Byte/2-Byte
?&t0P
?&t1P
?&t21P
?&t31P
?&t38P
(p)
(p)
(p)
(p)
(p)
027 038 116 48 080
027 038 116 49 080
027 038 116 050 049 080
027 038 116 051 049 080
027 038 116 051 056 080
(112)
(112)
(112)
(112)
(112)
1B 26 74 30 50
1B 26 74 31 50
1B 26 74 32 31 50
1B 26 74 33 31 50
1B 26 74 33 38 50
(70)
(70)
(70)
(70)
(70)
TRANSPARENT PRINT DATA
Transparent Print
Data # of Bytes ?&p#X[Data] 027 038 112 #...# 088 1B 26 70 #...# 58
1
Additional typefaces are supported, refer to Table C-2 and C-3 for a list of these symbol sets.
Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)
Printer Commands A-9
FUNCTION PARAMETER COMMAND DECIMAL VALUE HEXADECIMAL VALUE
FONT MANAGEMENT
Assign Font ID Font ID # ?*c#D (d) 027 042 099 #...# 068 (100) 1B 2A 63 #...# 44 (64)
Font and Character Control Delete all Fonts ?*c0F(f) 027 042 099 048 070 (102) 1B 2A 63 30 46 (66)
Delete all temporary fonts ?*c1F (f) 027 042 099 049 070 (102) 1B 2A 63 31 46 (66)
Delete last font ID specified ?*c2F (f) 027 042 099 050 070 (102) 1B 2A 63 32 46 (66)
Delete last character specified ?*c3F (f) 027 042 099 051 070 (102) 1B 2A 63 33 46 (66)
Make font temporary ?*c4F (f) 027 042 099 052 070 (102) 1B 2A 63 34 46 (66)
Make font permanent ?*c5F (f) 027 042 099 053 070 (102) 1B 2A 63 35 46 (66)
Copy/Assign the currently
invoked font as temporary ?*c6F (f) 027 042 099 054 070 (102) 1B 2A 63 36 46 (66)
Soft Symbol Set Management / Creation
Set Symbol Set ID # ?*c#R (r) 027 042 099 #...# 082 (114) 1B 2A 63 #...# 52 (72)
Define Symbol Set # of Bytes ?(f#W[Data] 027 040 102 #...# 087 1B 28 66 #...# 57
Symbol Set Control Delete all symbol sets ?*c0S(s) 027 042 099 048 083 (115) 1B 2A 63 30 53 (73)
Delete all temporary symbol
sets ?*c1S (s) 027 042 099 049 083 (115) 1B 2A 63 31 53 (73)
Delete current
soft symbol set
(last ID#)
?*c2S (s) 027 042 099 050 083 (115) 1B 2A 63 32 53 (73)
Make current soft symbol set
temporary ?*c4S (s) 027 042 099 052 083 (115) 1B 2A 63 34 53 (73)
Make current soft symbol set
permanent ?*c5S (s) 027 042 099 053 083 (115) 1B 2A 63 35 53 (73)
Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)
A-10 Printer Commands
FUNCTION PARAMETER COMMAND DECIMAL VALUE HEXADECIMAL VALUE
Font Selection by ID Number
Select font (with ID #) ID # primary font ?(#X 027 040 #...# 088 1B 28 #...# 58
ID # secondary font ?)#X 027 041 #...# 088 1B 29 #...# 58
SOFT FONT CREATION
Font descriptor
(font header) # of bytes ?)s#W[Data] 027 041 115 #...# 087 1B 29 73 #...# 57
Download character # of bytes ?(s#W[Data] 027 040 115 #...# 087 1B 28 73 #...# 57
Character code Character code # (decimal) ?*c#E (e) 027 042 099 #...# 069 (101) 1B 2A 63 #...# 45 (65)
GRAPHICS
Raster Graphics
Raster 75 dots/inch ?*t75R (r) 027 042 116 055 053 082 (114) 1B 2A 74 37 35 52 (72)
Resolution 100 dots/inch ?*t100R (r) 027 042 116 049 048 048 082 (114) 1B 2A 74 31 30 30 52 (72)
150 dots/inch ?*t150R(r) 027 042 116 049 053 048 082 (114) 1B 2A 74 31 35 30 52 (72)
200 dots/inch ?*t200R (r) 027 042 116 050 048 048 082 (114) 1B 2A 74 32 30 30 52 (72)
300 dots/inch ?*t300R (r) 027 042 116 051 048 048 082 (114) 1B 2A 74 33 30 30 52 (72)
600 dots/inch ?*t600R (r) 027 042 116 054 048 048 082 (114) 1B 2A 74 36 30 30 52 (72)
Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)
Printer Commands A-11
FUNCTION PARAMETER COMMAND DECIMAL VALUE HEXADECIMAL VALUE
Raster Graphics
Raster Graphics Presentation Follows orientation ?*r0F(f) 027 042 114 048 070 (102) 1B 2A 72 30 46 (66)
Follows physical page ?*r3F (f) 027 042 114 051 070 (102) 1B 2A 72 33 46 (66)
Start Raster Graphics Left Raster Graphics Margin ?*r0A(a) 027 042 114 048 065 (97) 1B 2A 72 30 41 (61)
Current Cursor ?*r1A (a) 027 042 114 049 065 (97) 1B 2A 72 31 41 (61)
Scale mode (logical left page
boundary) ?*r2A (a) 027 042 114 050 065 (97) 1B 2A 72 32 41 (61)
Scale mode (at CAP) ?*r3A (a) 027 042 114 051 065 (97) 1B 2A 72 33 42 (61)
Raster Y Offset # of Raster Lines of vertical
movement ?*b#Y (y) 027 042 098 #...# 089 (121) 1B 2A 62 #...# 59 (79)
Set Raster Compression Mode Unencoded ?*b0M(m) 027 042 098 048 077 (109) 1B 2A 62 30 4D (6D)
Run-Length Encoded ?*b1M (m) 027 042 098 049 077 (109) 1B 2A 62 31 4D (6D)
Tagged Image File Format ?*b2M (m) 027 042 098 050 077 (109) 1B 2A 62 32 4D (6D)
Delta Row ?*b3M (m) 027 042 098 051 077 (109) 1B 2A 62 33 4D (6D)
Adaptive Compression ?*b5M (m) 027 042 098 053 077 (109) 1B 2A 62 35 4D (6D)
Replacement Delta Row ?*b9M (m) 027 042 098 057 077 (109) 1B 2A 98 39 4D (6D)
Transfer Raster Data (by row) # of Bytes ?*b#W[Data] 027 042 098 #...# 087 1B 2A 62 #...# 57
Transfer Raster Data (by plane) # of Bytes ?*b#V[Data] 027 042 062 #...# 086 1B 2A 98 #...# 56
End Raster Graphics Old version Preferred ?*rB
?*rC (b)
(c) 027 042 114 066
027 042 114 067 (98)
(99) 1B 2A 72 42
1B 2A 72 43 (62)
(63)
Raster Height (Source) # Raster Rows ?*r#T (t) 027 042 114 #...# 084 (116) 1B 2A 72 #...# 54 (74)
Raster Width (Source) # Pixels of the Specified
Resolution ?*r#S (s) 027 042 114 #...# 083 (115) 1B 2A 72 #...# 53 (73)
Raster Height (Destination) # of Decipoints ?*t#H (h) 027 042 116 #...# 072 (104) 1B 2A 74 #...# 48 (68)
Raster Width (Destination) # of Decipoints ?*t#V (v) 027 042 116 #...# 086 (118) 1B 2A 74 #...# 56 (76)
Scale Algorithm Source with light background ?*t0K (k) 027 042 116 048 075 (107) 1B 2A 74 30 4B (6B)
Source with dark background ?*t1K (k) 027 042 116 049 075 (107) 1B 2A 74 31 4B (6B)
Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)
A-12 Printer Commands
FUNCTION PARAMETER COMMAND DECIMAL VALUE HEXADECIMAL VALUE
THE PRINT MODEL
Imaging
Select Current Pattern Solid Black (default) ?*v0T(t) 027 042 118 048 084 (116) 1B 2A 76 30 54 (74)
Solid White ?*v1T (t) 027 042 118 049 084 (116) 1B 2A 76 31 54 (74)
HP-defined Shading Pattern ?*v2T (t) 027 042 118 050 084 (116) 1B 2A 76 32 54 (74)
HP-defined
Cross-hatched Pattern ?*v3T (t) 027 042 118 051 084 (116) 1B 2A 76 33 54 (74)
User-defined Pattern ?*v4T (t) 027 042 118 052 084 (116) 1B 2A 76 34 54 (74)
Source Transparency code Transparent Opaque ?*v0N
?*v1N (n)
(n) 027 042 118 048 078
027 042 118 049 078 (110)
(110) 1B 2A 76 30 4E
1B 2A 76 31 4E (6E)
(6E)
Pattern Transparency Mode Transparent Opaque ?*v0O
?*v1O (o)
(o) 027 042 118 048 079
027 042 118 049 079 (111)
(111) 1B 2A 76 30 4F
1B 2A 76 31 4F (6F)
(6F)
Logical Operation # = ROP3 input value ?*l#O (o) 027 042 108 #...# 079 (111) 1B 2A 6C #...# 4F (6F)
Pixel Placement Grid Intersection ?*v0R(r) 027 042 108 048 082 (114) 1B 2A 6C 30 52 (72)
Pixel Placement ?*v1R (r) 027 042 118 049 082 (114) 1B 2A 76 31 52 (72)
Rectangle Dimensions
Rectangle Width (Horizontal
Size) # of dots ?*c#A (a) 027 042 099 #...# 065 (97) 1B 2A 63 #...# 41 (61)
# of decipoints ?*c#H (h) 027 042 099 #...# 072 (104) 1B 2A 63 #...# 48 (68)
Rectangle Height (Vertical
Size) # of dots ?*c#B (b) 027 042 099 #...# 066 (98) 1B 2A 63 # ... # 42 (62)
# of decipoints ?*c#V (v) 027 042 099 #...# 086 (118) 1B 2A 63 #...# 56 (76)
Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)
Printer Commands A-13
FUNCTION PARAMETER COMMAND DECIMAL VALUE HEXADECIMAL VALUE
Rectangular Area Fill
Fill Rectangular Area Solid Black ?*c0P(p) 027 042 099 048 080 (112) 1B 2A 63 30 50 (70)
Erase (solid white fill) ?*c1P (p) 027 042 099 049 080 (112) 1B 2A 63 31 50 (70)
Shaded Fill ?*c2P (p) 027 042 099 050 080 (112) 1B 2A 63 32 50 (70)
Cross-hatched Fill ?*c3P (p) 027 042 099 051 080 (112) 1B 2A 63 33 50 (70)
User-defined ?*c4P (p) 027 042 099 052 080 (112) 1B 2A 63 34 50 (70)
Current Pattern ?*c5P (p) 027 042 099 053 080 (112) 1B 2A 63 35 50 (70)
Pattern ID % of Shading or Type of
Pattern or User Pattern ID ?*c#G (g) 027 042 099 #...# 071 (103) 1B 2A 63 #...# 47 (67)
Shading 2% Gray ?*c2G (g) 027 042 099 050 071 (103) 1B 2A 63 32 47 (67)
10% Gray ?*c10G (g) 027 042 099 049 048 071 (103) 1B 2A 63 31 30 47 (67)
15% Gray ?*c15G (g) 027 042 099 049 053 071 (103) 1B 2A 63 31 35 47 (67)
30% Gray ?*c30G (g) 027 042 099 051 048 071 (103) 1B 2A 63 33 30 47 (67)
45% Gray ?*c45G (g) 027 042 099 052 053 071 (103) 1B 2A 63 34 35 47 (67)
70% Gray ?*c70G (g) 027 042 099 055 048 071 (103) 1B 2A 63 37 30 47 (67)
90% Gray ?*c90G (g) 027 042 099 057 048 071 (103) 1B 2A 63 39 30 47 (67)
100% Gray ?*c100G (g) 027 042 099 049 048 048 071 (103) 1B 2A 63 31 30 30 47 (67)
Pattern 1 Horiz. Line ?*c1G (g) 027 042 099 049 071 (103) 1B 2A 63 31 47 (67)
2 Vert. Lines ?*c2G (g) 027 042 099 050 071 (103) 1B 2A 63 32 47 (67)
3 Diagonal Lines ?*c3G (g) 027 042 099 051 071 (103) 1B 2A 63 33 47 (67)
4 Diagonal Lines ?*c4G (g) 027 042 099 052 071 (103) 1B 2A 63 34 47 (67)
5 Square Grid ?*c5G (g) 027 042 099 053 071 (103) 1B 2A 63 35 47 (67)
6 Diagonal Grid ?*c6G (g) 027 042 099 054 071 (103) 1B 2A 63 36 47 (67)
Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)
A-14 Printer Commands
FUNCTION PARAMETER COMMAND DECIMAL VALUE HEXADECIMAL VALUE
USER DEFINED PATTERN / MANAGEMENT CREATION
Define (Download) Pattern # of bytes ?*c#W[Data] 027 042 099 #...# 087 1B 2A 63 #...# 57
User-defined Pattern Control Delete all patterns ?*c0Q(q) 027 042 099 048 081 (113) 1B 2A 63 030 51 (71)
Delete all temporary patterns ?*c1Q (q) 027 042 099 049 081 (113) 1B 2A 63 031 51 (71)
Delete current pattern ?*c2Q (q) 027 042 099 050 081 (113) 1B 2A 63 032 51 (71)
Make pattern temporary ?*c4Q (q) 027 042 099 052 081 (113) 1B 2A 63 034 51 (71)
Make pattern permanent ?*c5Q (q) 027 042 099 053 081 (113) 1B 2A 63 035 51 (71)
Set Pattern Reference Rotate with orientation ?*p0R(r) 027 042 112 048 082 (114) 1B 2A 70 30 52 (72)
Point Follow physical page ?*p1R (r) 027 042 112 049 082 (114) 1B 2A 70 31 52 (72)
MACROS
Macro ID Macro ID # ?&f#Y (y) 027 038 102 #...# 089 (121) 1B 26 66 #...# 59 (79)
Macro Control Start Macro Def. ?&f0X (x) 027 038 102 048 088 (120) 1B 26 66 30 58 (78)
Stop Macro Def. ?&f1X (x) 027 038 102 049 088 (120) 1B 26 66 31 58 (78)
Execute Macro ?&f2X (x) 027 038 102 050 088 (120) 1B 26 66 32 58 (78)
Call Macro ?&f3X (x) 027 038 102 051 088 (120) 1B 26 66 33 58 (78)
Enable Overlay ?&f4X (x) 027 038 102 052 088 (120) 1B 26 66 34 58 (78)
Disable Overlay ?&f5X (x) 027 038 102 053 088 (120) 1B 26 66 35 58 (78)
Delete Macros ?&f6X (x) 027 038 102 054 088 (120) 1B 26 66 36 58 (78)
Delete All Temp. Macros ?&f7X (x) 027 038 102 055 088 (120) 1B 26 66 37 58 (78)
Delete Macro ID ?&f8X (x) 027 038 102 056 088 (120) 1B 26 66 38 58 (78)
Make Temporary ?&f9X (x) 027 038 102 057 088 (120) 1B 26 66 39 58 (78)
Make Permanent ?&f10X(x) 027 038 102 049 048 088 (120) 1B 26 66 31 30 58 (78)
Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)
Printer Commands A-15
FUNCTION PARAMETER COMMAND DECIMAL VALUE HEXADECIMAL VALUE
STATUS READBACK
Set Status Readback Location Type Invalid Location ?*s0T (t) 027 042 115 048 084 (116) 1B 2A 73 30 54 (74)
Currently Selected ?*s1T (t) 027 042 115 049 084 (116) 1B 2A 73 31 54 (74)
All Locations ?*s2T (t) 027 042 115 050 084 (116) 1B 2A 73 32 54 (74)
Internal ?*s3T (t) 027 042 115 051 084 (116) 1B 2A 73 33 54 (74)
Downloaded ?*s4T (t) 027 042 115 052 084 (116) 1B 2A 73 34 54 (74)
Cartridge ?*s5T (t) 027 042 115 053 084 (116) 1B 2A 73 35 54 (74)
User-installed ROM (SIMMs) ?*s7T (t) 027 042 115 055 084 (116) 1B 2A 73 37 54 (74)
Set Status Readback Location Unit All entities of the Location Type ?*s0U (u) 027 042 115 048 085 (117) 1B 2A 73 30 55 (75)
Entity 1 or Temporary ?*s1U (u) 027 042 115 049 085 (117) 1B 2A 73 31 55 (75)
Entity 2 or Permanent ?*s2U (u) 027 042 115 050 085 (117) 1B 2A 73 32 55 (75)
Entity 3 ?*s3U (u) 027 042 115 051 085 (117) 1B 2A 73 33 55 (75)
Entity 4 ?*s4U (u) 027 042 115 052 085 (117) 1B 2A 73 34 55 (75)
Inquire Status Readback Entity Font ?*s0I (i) 027 042 115 048 073 (105) 1B 2A 73 30 49 (69)
Macro ?*s1I (i) 027 042 115 049 073 (105) 1B 2A 73 31 49 (69)
User-defined Pattern ?*s2I (i) 027 042 115 050 073 (105) 1B 2A 73 32 49 (69)
Symbol Set ?*s3I (i) 027 042 115 051 073 (105) 1B 2A 73 33 49 (69)
Font Extended ?*s4I (i) 027 042 115 052 073 (105) 1B 2A 73 34 49 (69)
Flush All Pages Flush All Complete Pages ?&r0F (f) 027 038 114 048 070 (120) 1B 26 72 30 46 (66)
Flush All Page Data ?&r1F (f) 027 038 114 049 070 (120) 1B 26 72 31 46 (66)
Free Memory Space — ?*s1M (m) 027 042 115 049 077 (109) 1B 2A 73 31 4D (6D)
Echo # = Echo value (-32767 to 32767) ?*s#X (x) 027 042 115 #...# 088 (120) 1B 2A 73 #...# 58 (78)
PROGRAMMING HINTS
End-of-Line Wrap Enabled ?&s0C (c) 027 038 115 048 067 (99) 1B 26 73 30 43 (63)
Disabled ?&s1C (c) 027 038 115 049 067 (99) 1B 26 73 31 43 (63)
Display Functions ON ?Y 027 089 1B 59
OFF ?Z 027 090 1B 5A
Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)
A-16 Printer Commands
FUNCTION PARAMETER COMMAND DECIMAL VALUE HEXADECIMAL VALUE
PCL VECTOR GRAPHICS SWITCHING/SET-UP PICTURE FRAME
Enter PCL Mode Use previous PCL cursor
position ?%0A 027 037 048 65 1B 25 30 41
Use current HP-GL/2pen
position for cursor position ?%1A 027 037 049 65 1B 25 31 41
Enter HP-GL/2 Mode Use previous HP-GL/2 pen
position ?%0B 027 037 048 066 1B 25 30 42
Use current PCL cursor
position ?%1B 027 037 049 066 1B 25 31 42
Stand-alone plotter mode ?%–1B 027 037 045 049 066 1B 25 2D 31 42
Current PCL
coordinate system/old HP-GL
pen position
?%2B 027 037 050 066 1B 25 32 42
Current PCL coordinate
system/current PCL CAP ?%3B 027 037 051 066 1B 25 33 42
HP-GL/2 Plot Horzontal Size Horizontal size in inches ?*c#K (k) 027 042 099 #...# 075 (107) 1B 2A 63 # ... # 4B (6B)
HP-GL/2 Plot Vertical Size Vertical size in inches ?*c#L (l) 027 042 099 #...# 076 (108) 1B 2A 63 #...# 4C (6C)
Set Picture Frame Anchor
Point Set anchor point to cursor
position ?*c0T(t) 027 042 099 048 084 (116) 1B 2A 63 30 54 (74)
Picture Frame Horizontal Size Decipoints ?*c#X (x) 027 042 099 #...# 088 (120) 1B 2A 63 #...# 58 (78)
Picture Frame Vertical Size Decipoints ?*c#Y (y) 027 042 099 #...# 089 (121) 1B 2A 63 #...# 59 (79)
DUAL CONTEXT EXTENSIONS
Enter PCL Mode ?%#A 0 - Retain previous
PCL cursor position
1 - Use current
HP-GL/2 pen
position
Reset ?E None
Primary Font FI Font_ID
Secondary Font FN Font_ID
Scalable Or
Bitmapped Fonts SB 0 - Scalable
fonts only
1 - Bitmapped
fonts allowed
Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)
Printer Commands A-17
FUNCTION PARAMETER COMMAND DECIMAL VALUE HEXADECIMAL VALUE
COLOR COMMANDS
Assign Color Index Index Number ?*v#I (i) 027 042 118 #...# 073 (105) 1B 2A 76 #...# 49 (69)
Color Component One 1st Component ?*v#A (a) 027 042 118 #...# 065 (97) 1B 2A 76 #...# 41 (61)
Color Component Two 2nd Component ?*v#B (b) 027 042 118 #...# 066 (98) 1B 2A 76 #...# 42 (62)
Color Component Three 3rd Component ?*v#C (c) 027 042 118 #...# 067 (99) 1B 2A 76 #...# 43 (63)
Color Lookup Tables # of Bytes ?*l#W[Data] 027 042 108 #...# 087 1B 2A 6C #...# 57
Configure Image Data # of Bytes ?*v#W[Data] 027 042 118 #...# 087 1B 2A 76 #...# 57
Download Dither Matrix # of Bytes ?*v#I (i) 027 042 118 #...# 073 (105) 1B 2A 76 #...# 49 (69)
Foreground Color Index Number ?*v#S (s) 027 042 118 #...# 083 (115) 1B 2A 76 #...# 53 (73)
Gamma Correction Gamma Number ?*t#I (i) 027 042 116 #...# 073 (105) 1B 2A 74 #...# 49 (69)
Monochrome Print Mode Mixed Rendering ?&b0M (m) 027 038 062 048 077 (109) 1B 26 98 30 4D (6D)
Gray Equivalent ?&b1M (m) 027 038 062 049 077 (109) 1B 26 98 31 4D (6D)
Palette Control ID Palette ID # ?&p#I (i) 027 038 112 #...# 073 (105) 1B 26 70 #...# 49 (69)
Palette Control Delete All Palettes in store ?&p0C (c) 027 038 112 048 067 (99) 1B 26 70 30 43 (63)
Delete All Palettes in stack ?&p1C (c) 027 038 112 049 067 (99) 1B 26 70 31 43 (63)
Delete Palette (last ID) ?&p2C (c) 027 038 112 050 067 (99) 1B 26 70 32 43 (63)
Copy Palette ?&p6C (c) 027 038 112 054 067 (99) 1B 26 70 36 43 (63)
Push/Pop Palette Push Palette ?*p0P (p) 027 042 112 048 080 (112) 1B 2A 70 30 50 (70)
Pop Palette ?*p1P (p) 027 042 112 049 080 (112) 1B 2A 70 31 50 (70)
Render Algorithm Continuous tone detail ?*t0J (j) 027 042 116 048 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 30 4A (6A)
Snap to primaries ?*t1J (j) 027 042 116 049 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 31 4A (6A)
Snap black/white, colors to black ?*t2J (j) 027 042 116 050 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 32 4A (6A)
Device best dither ?*t3J (j) 027 042 116 051 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 33 4A (6A)
Error diffusion ?*t4J (j) 027 042 116 052 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 34 4A (6A)
Monochrome device best dither ?*t5J (j) 027 042 116 053 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 35 4A (6A)
Monochrome error diffusion ?*t6J (j) 027 042 116 054 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 36 4A (6A)
Cluster ordered dither ?*t7J (j) 027 042 116 055 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 37 4A (6A)
Monochrome cluster ordered ?*t8J (j) 027 042 116 056 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 38 4A (6A)
User-defined dither ?*t9J (j) 027 042 116 057 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 30 4A (6A)
Monochrome user-defined dither ?*t10J (j) 027 042 116 049 048 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 31 30 4A (6A)
Ordered dither ?*t11J (j) 027 042 116 049 049 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 31 31 4A (6A)
Monochrome ordered dither ?*t12J (j) 027 042 116 049 050 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 31 32 4A (6A)
Noise ordered dither ?*t13J (j) 027 042 116 049 051 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 31 33 4A (6A)
Monochrome noise ordered dither ?*t14J (j) 027 042 116 049 052 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 31 34 4A (6A)
Continuous tone smooth ?*t15J (j) 027 042 116 049 053 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 31 35 4A (6A)
Mono. continuous tone detail ?*t16J (j) 027 042 116 049 054 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 31 36 4A (6A)
Mono. continuous tone smooth ?*t17J (j) 027 042 116 049 055 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 31 37 4A (6A)
Continuous tone basic ?*t18J (j) 027 042 116 049 056 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 31 38 4A (6A)
Mono. continuous tone basic ?*t19J (j) 027 042 116 049 057 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 31 39 4A (6A)
Select Palette Palette ID # ?&p#S (s) 027 038 112 #...# 083 (115) 1B 26 70 #...# 53 (73)
Set Viewing Illumination # of Bytes ?*i#W[Data] 027 042 105 #...# 087 1B 2A 69 #...# 57
Simple Color 3-Plane Device CMY Palette ?*r–3U (u) 027 042 114 045 051 085 (117) 1B 2A 72 2D 33 55 (75)
1-Plane K Palette ?*r1U (u) 027 042 114 049 085 (117) 1B 2A 72 31 55 (75)
3-Plane Device RGB Palette ?*r3U (u) 027 042 114 051 085 (117) 1B 2A 72 33 55 (75)
Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)
A-18 Printer Commands
COMMAND MNEMONIC PARAMETERS*
PALETTE EXTENSIONS
Color Range CR [b_ref_red, w_ref_red, b_ref_grn, w_ref_grn, b_ref_blue, w_ref_blue];
Number of Pens NP [n];
Pen Color Assignment PC [pen [,red, green, blue]];
Transparency Mode TR 0 - Off (opaque)
1 - On (transparent)
Screened Vectors SV [screen_type[,shading[,index]]]
VECTOR GROUP
Arc Absolute AA x_center,y_center,sweep_angle [,chord_angle];
Arc Relative AR x_increment,y_increment,sweep_angle [,chord_angle];
Absolute Arc Three Point AT x_inter,y_inter,x_end,y_end[,chord_angle];
Bezier Absolute BZ x1_control_pt, y1_control_pt
x2_control_pt, y2_control_pt
x3_control_pt, y3_control_pt ...
[x1_control_pt, y1_control_pt
x2_control_pt, y2_control_pt
x3_control_pt, y3_control_pt];
Bezier Relative BR x1_control_pt_increments,
y1_control_pt_increments,
x2_control_pt_increments,
y2_control_pt_increments,
x3_control_pt_increments,
y3_control_pt_increments ...
[x1_control_pt_increments,
y1_control_pt_increments,
x2_control_pt_increments,
y2_control_pt_increments,
x3_control_pt_increments,
y3_control_pt_increments];
Circle CI radius [,chord angle];
Plot Absolute PA [x,y ... [,x,y]];
Plot Relative PR [x,y ... [,x,y]];
Pen Down PD [x,y ... [,x,y]];
Pen Up PU [x,y ... [,x,y]];
Relative Arc Three Point RT x_incr_inter,y_incr_inter,x_incr_end,y_incr_end[,chord angle];
Polyline Encoded PE [flag[val]|coord pair ... [flag[val]|coord pair]];
* Parameters in brackets are optional.
Table A-2. HP-GL/2 Commands
Printer Commands A-19
COMMAND MNEMONIC PARAMETERS*
POLYGON GROUP
Fill Rectangle Absolute RA x_coordinate,y_coordinate;
Fill Rectangle Relative RR x_increment,y_increment;
Edge Rectangle Absolute EA x_coordinate,y_coordinate;
Edge Rectangle Relative ER x_increment,y_increment;
Fill Wedge WG radius,start_angle,sweep_angle[,chord_angle];
Edge Wedge EW radius,start_angle,sweep_angle[chord_angle];
Polygon Mode PM polygon_definition;
Fill Polygon FP 0- Odd/Even
1 - non-zero winding
Edge Polygon EP None
* Parameters in brackets are optional.
Table A-2. HP-GL/2 Commands (continued)
A-20 Printer Commands
FUNCTION MNEMONIC PARAMETERS*
CHARACTER GROUP
Select Standard Font SS None
Select Alternate Font SA None
Absolute Direction DI [run,rise];
Relative Direction DR [run,rise];
Absolute Character Size SI [width,height];
Relative Character Size SR [width,height];
Character Slant SL [tangent_of_angle];
Extra Space ES [width[,height]]
Standard Font Definition SD [kind,value ... [,kind,value]];
Alternate Font Definition AD [kind,value ... [,kind,value]];
Character Fill Mode CF [fill_mode[,edge_pen]];
Label Origin LO [position];
Label LB [char ... [char]]1bterm
Define Label Terminator DT [1bterm[,mode]];
Character Plot CP [spaces,lines];
Transparent Data TD [mode];
Define Variable Text Path DV [path[,line]];
LINE AND FILL ATTRIBUTES GROUP
Line Type LT [line_type[,pattern_length[,mode]]];
Line Attributes LA [kind,value ... [,kind,value]];
Pen Width PW [width[,pen]];
Pen Width Unit Selection WU [type];
Select Pen SP [pen]; (required, 1 for black (recommended) or
0 for white)
Symbol Mode SM [char];
Fill Type FT [fill_type[,option1[,option2]]];
Anchor Corner AC [x_coordinate,y_coordinate];
Raster Fill Definition RF [index[,width,height,pen_nbr ... pen_nbr]];
(width and height must be less than 255)
User Defined Line Type UL [index[,gap1 ... gapn]];
* Parameters in brackets are optional.
Table A-2. HP-GL/2 Commands (continued)
Printer Commands A-21
FUNCTION MNEMONIC PARAMETERS*
CONFIGURATION AND STATUS GROUP
Advance Full Page PG [n];
Scale SC [x1,x2,y1,y2[,type[,left,bottom]]];
or
[x1,xfactor,y1,yfactor,2];
Input Window IW [xLL,yLL,xUR,yUR];
Input P1 and P2 IP [p1x,p1y[,p2x,p2y]];
Input Relative P1 And P2 IR [p1x,p1y[,p2x,p2y]];
Default Values DF None
Initialize IN [n];
Replot RP [n];
Rotate Coordinate System RO [angle];
TECHNICAL GRAPHICS EXTENSION
Begin Plot BP [kind, value...[,kind, value]];
Chord Tolerance Mode CT [mode];
Download Character DL [charnum [[,up], x, y...[,up],x,y]];
Frame Advance FR
Media Type MT [type];
Merge Control MC [mode [, opcod]];
Output Error OE
Output Hardclip Limits OH
Output Identification OI
Output P1 and P2 OP
Output Status OS
Pixel Placement PP [mode];
Plot Size PS [length [,width]];
Quality Level QL [quality level]
* Parameters in brackets are optional.
Table A-2. HP-GL/2 Commands (continued)
A-22 Printer Commands
Function Symbol Decimal
Value Description
Backspace BS8 Move one column left unless at left margin, in
which case no action is taken.
Horizontal Tab HT9 Move to the next horizontal tab stop. The tab
stops are at the left margin, and every eight
columns to the right of the left margin.
Line Feed LF10 Move to the next print line while maintaining
current column position.
Form Feed FF12 Move to the first line at top of the next page while
maintaining current column position.
Carriage Return CR13 Move to the left margin on the current print line.
Shift Out SO14 Select characters that follow from the current
secondary font until receipt of a Shift In.
Shift In SI15 Select characters that follow from the current
primary font until receipt of a Shift Out.
Escape EC27 Indicates the beginning of a special control
sequence (escape sequence).
Space SP32 Move one column to the right unless already at
the right margin, in which case no action is taken.
Table A-3. Control Codes
Printer Commands A-23
A-24 Printer Commands
B
Internal Symbol Set Charts
Introduction This section includes symbol set tables showing character
locations and decimal addresses. Individual tables are
provided for the following symbol sets:
Roman-8 ISO 8859/9 Latin 5
DeskTop Windows 3.1 Latin 5
Windows 3.1 Latin 1 “ANSI” Ventura Math1
ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 Math-81
PC-8 Pi Font1
PC-850 PS Math1
PS Text Symbol2
MC Text Wingdings2
Ventura International PC 1004
PC-8 D/N PC 775
Ventura US Windows Baltic
Legal ISO 8859/10 Latin 6
Windows 3.0 Latin 1 Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats2
Microsoft Publishing1PS ITC Zapf Dingbats2
PC-852 ITC Zapf Dingbats series 1002
PC-8 Turkish ITC Zapf Dingbats series 2002
ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 ITC Zapf Dingbats series 3002
Windows 3.1 Latin 2
1
Intellifont only except for HP LaserJet 5, 5M, and 4000 series printers where they are also True-
Type. These math sets are inappropriate in script faces, italic faces, or any unusual weight or
style. MS Publishing and Pi Font may be used with script, italic, or unusual weight styles, since
these sets contain few “limited sensitivity” characters that conflict with the typeface sensitive
characters of that typeface.
2
Available in one typeface only.
Internal Symbol Set Charts B-1
The gray shaded areas in these tables denote printer
control code areas. Math composite characters are shown
with light-colored shades, and line-draw composite
characters are shown with dark-colored shades. Composite
characters are made by combining individual character
elements into a large character.
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO)
symbol sets and the HP German and HP Spanish symbol
sets are represented by a character substitution table (see
page B-19). The final table, the Roman-8 Character
Conversion table identifies the hexadecimal, decimal, and
octal codes for the Roman-8 symbol set.
Note To identify the symbol sets that are supported by a printer,
refer to Chapter 3, Internal Typefaces/Fonts and Symbol
Sets,” in this document.
B-2 Internal Symbol Set Charts
8U Roman-8 (R8)
7J DeskTop (DT)
Internal Symbol Set Charts B-3
0N ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 (E1)
19U Windows 3.1 Latin 1 (W1)
B-4 Internal Symbol Set Charts
12U PC-850 Multilingual (PM)
10U PC-8 Code Page 437 (PC)
Internal Symbol Set Charts B-5
12J MC Text (MC)
10J PS Text (TS)
B-6 Internal Symbol Set Charts
11U PC-8 Danish/Norwegian (PD)
13J Ventura International (VI)
Internal Symbol Set Charts B-7
1U Legal (LG)
14J Ventura US (VU)
B-8 Internal Symbol Set Charts
6J Microsoft Publishing (PG)
9U Windows 3.0 Latin 1 (WO)
Internal Symbol Set Charts B-9
17U PC-852 Latin 2 (PE)
9T PC-Turkish (PT)
B-10 Internal Symbol Set Charts
9E Windows 3.1 Latin 2 (WE)
2N ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 (E2)
Internal Symbol Set Charts B-11
5N ISO 8859/9 Latin 5 (E5)
5T Windows 3.1 Latin (WT)
B-12 Internal Symbol Set Charts
9J PC-1004, Code Page 1004 (PU)
26U PC-775, Code Page 775 (PV)
Internal Symbol Set Charts B-13
19L Windows Baltic (WL)
6N ISO 8859/10 Latin 6 (E6)
B-14 Internal Symbol Set Charts
6M Ventura Math (VM)
8M Math-8 (M8)
Internal Symbol Set Charts B-15
5M PS Math (MS)
15U Pi Font (PI)
B-16 Internal Symbol Set Charts
19M Symbol Font (AS)
579L Wingdings Font (L$)
Internal Symbol Set Charts B-17
9L Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats (DV)
10L PS ITC Zapf Dingbats (DS)
B-18 Internal Symbol Set Charts
11L ITC Zapf Dingbats series 100 (D1)
12L ITC Zapf Dingbats series 200 (D2)
Internal Symbol Set Charts B-19
13L ITC Zapf Dingbats series 300 (D3)
B-20 Internal Symbol Set Charts
ISO Substitution
Table This table provides a quick reference for the values of
special characters contained in ISO (International
Organization of Standardization) symbol sets. ISO symbol
sets contain the same characters as the ASCII symbol set,
except for the character positions listed in this table. For
example, in the ISO 4 (United Kingdom) symbol set, the
British pound sign replaces the number sign used in
decimal position 35 of the ASCII symbol set.
* These symbol sets are becoming obsolete and are not recommended for future use and are not present on the HP LaserJet 4, 4M, 4Si,
4SiMx, 4L, 4ML, 4P, 4MP, 4PJ, 4LJ Pro, 4LC, 4 Plus, 4M Plus, 4V, 4MV, 4000 series, 5, 5M, 5P, 5L, 5Si, 5SiMx, 5Si Mopier, 6L, 6P, 6M P,
Color LaserJet, Color LaserJet 5, 5M, and DeskJet 1200C, 1600C printers.
Table B-1. ISO Substitution Characters
Internal Symbol Set Charts B-21
Conversion Table Table B-2 gives the hexadecimal, decimal, and octal
equivalent of each character in the Roman-8 symbol set.
Use this table when your software requires hexadecimal,
decimal, or octal values in place of your printer command
characters.
This conversion table begins on the following page.
B-22 Internal Symbol Set Charts
Table B-2. Roman-8 Character Conversion
Internal Symbol Set Charts B-23
Table B-2. Roman-8 Character Conversion (continued)
B-24 Internal Symbol Set Charts
Table B-2. Roman-8 Character Conversion (continued)
Internal Symbol Set Charts B-25
Table B-2. Roman-8 Character Conversion (continued)
B-26 Internal Symbol Set Charts
Table B-2. Roman-8 Character Conversion (continued)
Internal Symbol Set Charts B-27
Table B-2. Roman-8 Character Conversion (continued)
B-28 Internal Symbol Set Charts
Table B-2. Roman-8 Character Conversion (continued)
Internal Symbol Set Charts B-29
B-30 Internal Symbol Set Charts
C
Symbol Set and Typeface Codes
Introduction The symbol set IDs in Table C-1 are used to select symbol
sets using PCL commands. Kind1 values are used to select
symbol sets using HP-GL/2 commands. The values under
Kind1 are also used in the Font Descriptor (header) symbol
set field (bytes 14/15, described in Chapter 11, Font
Creation of the PCL 5 Printer Language Technical Reference
Manual). Table C-2 identifies the Typeface Family values
for the various type foundries. Table C-3 identifies all the
currently assigned typeface base values.
Symbol Set and Typeface Codes C-1
Note The HP-GL/2 Kind1 value can be calculated from the sym-
bol set ID. The Kind1 value is the same value used for the
Symbol Set value field in the Font Header (refer to Chapter
11, Symbol Set of the PCL 5 Printer Language Technical
Reference Manual). The Kind1 value is computed by taking
the value of the value field for the symbol set, multiplying it
by 32, adding the decimal (ASCII) value of the termination
character (the symbol set ID character value) of the escape
sequence, and subtracting 64.
Font Descriptor Symbol Set Value =
(Escape Sequence Value Field Value * 32)
+
(Decimal Value of Escape Sequence
Termination Character - 64).
For example, to calculate the Kind1 value for the symbol
set 19M (M = ASCII 77):
Symbol set 19M = (19*32) + (77 -64) = 621
C-2 Symbol Set and Typeface Codes
Symbol Set Name
1
Symbol
Set ID Kind1
Value
2
GW-3212 18C 597
ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian 0D 4
Devanagari 2D 68
ISO 4: United Kingdom 1E 37
Windows 3.1 Latin 2 9E 293
ISO 69: French 1F 38
ISO 21: German 1G 39
Greek-8 8G 263
Windows 3.1 Latin/Greek 9G 295
PC-851 Latin/Greek 10G 327
PC-8 Latin/Greek 12G 391
Hebrew-7 0H 8
ISO 8859/8 Latin/Hebrew 7H 232
Hebrew-8 8H 264
PC-862 Latin/Hebrew 15H 488
ISO 15: Italian 0I 9
Microsoft Publishing 6J 202
DeskTop 7J 234
Document 8J 266
PC-1004 9J 298
PS Text 10J 330
PS ISO Latin1 11J 362
MC Text 12J 394
Ventura International313J 426
Ventura US314J 458
Swash Characters 16J 522
Small Caps & Old Style Figures 17J 554
Old Style Figures 18J 586
Fractions 19J 618
Lining Figures 21J 682
Small Caps and Lining Figures 22J 714
Alternate Caps 23J 746
Kana-8 (JIS 210) 8K 267
Korean-8 9K 299
Symbol Set Name
1
Symbol
Set ID Kind1
Value
2
Line Draw-7 0L 12
HP Block Characters 1L 44
Tax Line Draw 2L 76
Line Draw-8 8L 268
Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats39L 300
PS ITC Zapf Dingbats 10L 332
ITC Zapf Dingbats Series 100 11L 364
ITC Zapf Dingbats Series 200 12L 396
ITC Zapf Dingbats Series 300 13L 428
Windows Baltic 19L 620
Carta 20L 652
Ornaments 21L 684
Universal News & Commercial Pi 22L 716
Chess 23L 748
Astrology 1 24L 780
Pi Set #1 31L 1004
Pi Set #2 32L 1036
Pi Set #3 33L 1068
Pi Set #4 34L 1100
Pi Set #5 35L 1132
Pi Set #6 36L 1164
Wingdings 579L 18540
Math-7 0M 13
Tech-7 1M 45
PS Math 5M 173
Ventura Math36M 205
Math-8 8M 269
Universal Greek & Math Pi 10M 333
TeX Math Extension 11M 365
TeX Math Symbol 12M 397
TeX Math Italic 13M 429
Symbol 19M 621
ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 0N 14
ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 2N 78
Table C-1. Symbol Set Values
1
Contact your local software vendor for information regarding additional symbol set support.
2
This value is also used for the Encoded Symbol Set Designator field in the user-defined symbol set descriptor, and for the Symbol Set field
in the font headers.
3
Not recommended for future use. These symbol sets are of limited usage and are being discontinued.
Symbol Set and Typeface Codes C-3
Symbol Set Name
1
Symbol
Set ID Kind1
Value
2
ISO 8859/3 Latin 3 3N 110
ISO 8859/4 Latin 4 4N 142
ISO 8859/9 Latin 5 5N 174
ISO 8859/10 Latin 6 6N 206
ISO 8859/5 Latin/Cyrillic 10N 334
ISO 8859/6 Latin/Arabic 11N 366
ISO 8859/7 Latin/Greek 12N 398
OCR-A 0O 15
OCR-B 1O 47
OCR-M 2O 79
MICR (E13B) 10O 335
Typewriter Paired APL 0P 16
Bit Paired APL 1P 48
Expert 10P 336
Alternate 11P 368
Fraktur 12P 400
Reserved for Specials xQ 17+32x
Cyrillic ASCII (8859/5-1986) 0R 18
Cyrillic 1R 50
PC Cyrillic 3R 114
Windows 3.1 Latin/Cyrillic 9R 306
ISO 11: Swedish 0S 19
ISO 17: Spanish32S 83
HP European Spanish 7S 243
HP Latin Spanish 8S 275
HP-GL Download 16S 531
HP-GL Drafting 17S 563
HP-GL Special Symbols 18S 595
Sonata 20S 659
Thai-8 0T 20
TISI 620-2533 (Thai) 1T 52
Windows 3.1 Latin 5 5T 180
Turkish-8 8T 276
Symbol Set Name
1
Symbol
Set ID Kind1
Value
2
PC-8 Turkish 9T 308
Teletex 10T 340
ISO 6: ASCII 0U 21
Legal 1U 53
HPL 5U 181
OEM-1 7U 245
Roman-8 8U 277
Windows 3.0 Latin 1 9U 309
PC-8, Code Page 437 10U 341
PC-8 D/N, Danish/Norwegian 11U 373
PC-850, Multilingual 12U 405
Pi Font 15U 501
PC-857 16U 533
PC-852, Latin 2 17U 565
Windows 3.1 Latin 1 19U 629
PC-860 Portugal 20U 661
PC-861 Iceland 21U 693
PC-863 Canada-French 23U 757
PC-865 Norway 25U 821
PC-775 26U 853
Arabic-8 8V 278
Windows 3.1 Latin/Arabic 9V 310
Code Page 864 Latin/Arabic 10V 342
3 of 9 Barcode 0Y 25
Industrial 2 of 5 Barcode 1Y 57
Matrix 2 of 5 Barcode 2Y 89
Interleaved 2 of 5 Barcode 4Y 153
CODABAR Barcode 5Y 185
MSI/Plessey Barcode 6Y 217
Code 11 Barcode 7Y 249
UPC/EAN Barcode 8Y 281
MICR (CMC-7) 14Y 473
USPS ZIP 15Y 505
Table C-1. Symbol Set Values (continued)
1
Contact your local software vendor for information regarding additional symbol set support.
2
This value is also used for the Encoded Symbol Set Designator field in the user-defined symbol set descriptor and for the Symbol Set field
in the font headers.
3
These symbol sets are becoming obsolete and are not recommended for future use and are not present on the HP LaserJet 4, 4M, 4Si,
4SiMx, 4L, 4ML, 4P, 4MP, 4PJ, 4LJ Pro, 4LC, 4 Plus, 4M Plus, 4V, 4MV, 4000 series, 5, 5M, 5P, 5L, 5Si, 5SiMx, 5Si Mopier, 6L, 6P, 6M P,
Color LaserJet, and DeskJet 1200C, 1600C printers.
C-4 Symbol Set and Typeface Codes
Table C-2 represents the typeface family values assigned to
type foundries. This value, plus the typeface base value (see
Table C-3), produces the numeric code needed to access the
typeface.
Examples:
CG Times from Agfa = 5 + 4096 = 4101.
801 from Bitstream Inc. = 5 + 8192 = 8197
Univers from Agfa = 52 + 4096 = 4148.
Times New Roman from Monotype = 517 + 16384 = 16901
Symbol Set Name
1
Symbol
Set ID Kind1
Value
2
Obsolete Symbol Sets3
Math-7 (same as 0M) 0A 1
Line Draw-7 (same as 0L) 0B 2
HP Large Characters 0C 3
ISO 61: Norwegian Version 2 1D 36
Roman Extension 0E 5
ISO 25: French 0F 6
HP German 0G 7
ISO 14: JIS ASCII 0K 11
ISO 13: Katakana 1K 43
Symbol Set Name
1
Symbol
Set ID Kind1
Value
2
Obsolete Symbol Sets3
ISO 57: Chinese 2K 75
HP Spanish 1S 51
ISO 10: Swedish 3S 115
ISO 16: Portuguese 4S 147
ISO 84: Portuguese 5S 179
ISO 85: Spanish 6S 211
ISO 2: International Reference 2U 85
Arabic (McKay’s version) 0V 22
Table C-1. Symbol Set Values (continued)
Vendor Name Typeface Vendor Value
AGFA 4096
Bitstream Inc. 8192
Linotype Company 12288
Monotype Corporation 16384
Adobe Systems 20480
Bigelow & Holmes 28672
Table C-2. Typeface Family Values
Symbol Set and Typeface Codes C-5
Value Typeface Family
1
0 Line Printer
2 Elite
3 Courier
4 Helvetica
5 Times Roman
6 Letter Gothic
7 Script
8 Prestige
9 Caslon 540 & No. 3
9 Caslon Antique (contour)
9 Caslon Open Face (inline)
10 Orator
11 Presentation
13 Serifa
14 Futura
14 Greek Futura
15 Palatino
16 ITC Souvenir
16 ITC Souvenir Greek
17 Optima
17 Safeer (Arabic)
17 Komain (Thai)
17 Greek Oracle
18 ITC Garamond
20 Coronet (italic)
20 Chevalier (bold expanded pattern 0)
21 Broadway
23 Century Schoolbook
23 Greek & Math Serif
24 University Roman
27 ITC Korinna
28 Naskh
29 Cloister Black
30 ITC Galliard
31 ITC Avant Garde Gothic
31 Tom (Thai)
Value Typeface Family
1
32 Brush (italic)
32 Stop
33 Blippo (black)
33 Tea Chest (condensed)
34 Hobo
35 Windsor
38 Peignot
39 Baskerville
41 Trade Gothic
41 Pemai (Thai)
41 CG Trade
42 Goudy Old Style
43 ITC Zapf Chancery
44 Clarendon
45 ITC Zapf Dingbats
46 Cooper
47 ITC Bookman
47 Noparat (Thai)
48 Stick
49 HP-GL Drafting
50 HP-GL Spline
51 Gill Sans
51 Unesco (Thai)
52 Univers
53 Bodoni
53 Poster Bodoni (black)
53 Greek Apla
54 Rockwell
55 Melior
56 ITC Tiffany
57 ITC Clearface
58 Amelia
59 Park Avenue (italic)
59 Falstaff (black)
60 Handel Gothic
61 Dom Casual
Table C-3. Typeface Base Values
1
These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the
owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts
does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.
C-6 Symbol Set and Typeface Codes
Value Typeface Family
1
62 ITC Benguiat
63 ITC Cheltenham
64 Century Expanded
65 Franklin Gothic
65 Paetai (Thai)
68 Plantin
69 Trump Mediaeval
70 Futura Black
71 ITC American Typewriter
72 Antique Olive
72 Greek Antique Olive
73 Uncial
74 ITC Bauhaus
75 Century Old Style
76 ITC Eras
77 Friz Quadrata (ITC)
78 ITC Lubalin Graph
79 Eurostile
79 Intanon (Thai)
79 Greek Microstyle
80 Mincho (Japanese)
80 Myoungjo (Korean)
80 HanYang Batang Proportional (Korean)
81 ITC Serif Gothic
81 Saemmul (Korea)
81 Sammul (Korea)
82 Snell Roundhand
82 Pilgy (Korean)
83 Souvenir Gothic
84 Stymie
87 Bernhard Modern
89 Excelsior
90 Gando Ronde Script
91 Ondine
91 EACT (Thai)
92 P. T. Barnum
Value Typeface Family
1
93 Kaufmann
93 U-Thong (Thai)
94 ITC Bolt (extended)
94 ITC Machine (condensed)
97 Revue
101 Garamond (Stempel)
102 Garth Graphic
103 ITC Ronda
103 Candy Bits (patterned)
104 OCR-A
105 Cochin
106 Englische Schreibschrift (italic)
106 Mister Earl (condensed)
107 Flash (italic)
107 Woodstock
108 Gothic (numbered)
109 Stencil (ATF)
110 OCR-B
111 Akzidenz-Grotesk
112 Black White (patterned, outline, inline)
112 Logos
113 Shannon
114 ITC Stone Informal
115 ITC Stone Sans
116 ITC Stone Serif
117 Schneidler Mediaeval
118 ITC Symbol
119 ITC Weidemann
120 Copperplate Gothic (display)
121 Trajan
122 Concorde
123 Janson Text
124 Linotype Centennial
125 Life
126 Minister
127 New Century Schoolbook
Table C-3. Typeface Base Values (continued)
1
These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the
owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts
does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.
Symbol Set and Typeface Codes C-7
Value Typeface Family
1
152 Maru Gosikku (round gothic Japan)
152 Gulrim (Korean)
152 HanYang Gulrim Proportional (Korean)
153 Gosikku (Kaku, gothic Japan)
153 Gothic (Japan, Fixed Pitch)
153 HanYang Dotum Proportional (Korean)
154 Socho
155 Kyokasho (text book)
156 Kaisho
157 Traditional Arabic Script
158 Arabic News
159 Post Antiqua
160 Aerospace Pi
160 Devanagari (Hindi)
161 Maritime Pi
161 Krishna (Gujarati)
162 Bits Pic Pi
162 Ranjit (Gurmukhi)
163 Keycap Pi
163 Raj Raja (Tamil)
164 Tieman
164 Gyosho
165 David
166 Nork
167 Ousbouh
168 Koufi
169 Italia (ITC)
169 Hadassah
170 Bembo
170 Sharif
171 Aachen
171 Malik
172 Americana
173 Arnold Boecklin
174 Copperplate Gothic (text)
175 Belwe
Value Typeface Family
1
176 ITC Berkeley Oldstyle
177 Frutiger
178 Candida
179 Folio
180 Corona
181 ITC Kabel
181 Zeppelin (inline)
182 Garamond No. 3
183 Sabon
184 ITC Novarese
185 Weiss
186 Hiroshige
187 French Script
188 Meridien
189 Mistral
190 Aster
191 Caledonia
192 Nuptial Script
193 Lucida
194 Song (China)
194 Adobe Wood Series 1
195 Memphis
196 Lucida Sans
197 Syntax
198 Utopia
199 Berthold Walbaum Buch
200 Minion
201 Marigold
202 ITC Tiepolo
203 Versailles
204 ITC Leawood
205 ITC Caslon No. 224
206 ITC Cushing
207 ITC Fenice
208 ITC Usherwood
209 ITC Benguiat Gothic
Table C-3. Typeface Base Values (continued)
1
These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the
owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts
does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.
C-8 Symbol Set and Typeface Codes
Value Typeface Family
1
210 Spartan
210 ITC Ozwald (fatface)
211 Neuzeit Grotesk
212 PMN Caecilia
213 ITC Busorama
214 Agfa Wile Roman
215 ITC Zapf International
216 Poppl-Pontifex
217 ITC Quay Sans
218 Arial
219 Fairfield
220 ITC Zapf Book
221 Lucida Casual
221 Linotype Technical Pi 1 & 2
222 Graphite
222 Linotype Textil Pi 1 & 2
223 Poetica
223 Century Schoolbook Monospace
224 Berliner Grotesk
225 Christiana
226 Comenius-Antiqua
227 Delta
228 Italian Old Style
229 Zingo
230 Octavian
230 Borders & Ornaments 1
231 Footlight
231 Borders & Ornaments 4
232 Apollo
232 Borders & Ornaments 5
233 Bremen
233 Borders & Ornaments 6
234 Oranda
234 Communication 1
235 Nubian
235 Communication 2
Value Typeface Family
1
236 Cataneo
236 Communication 3
237 Wittenberger Fraktur
237 Communication 6
238 Modern
238 PL Modern
238 Games & Sports 1
239 Artistik
239 Games & Sports 2
240 Flintstones
240 Games & Sports 3
241 SnowCap
241 Games & Sports 4
242 Bedrock
242 Holidays 1
243 Star Fleet
243 Industry & Engineering 1
244 Star Trek Film
244 Industry & Engineering 2
245 Star Trek
245 Transportation 1
246 Hei (China)
246 Star Trek Pi
246 Transportation 2
247 ITC Mendoza
248 Boton
249 Jaeger Daily News
250 ITC Officina Serif
251 ITC Officina Sans
252 Goudy Modern
253 Scotch Roman
254 Temporary-Only Font
256 Bar Codes
257 Hadriano
258 Joanna
259 Onyx
Table C-3. Typeface Base Values (continued)
1
These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the
owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts
does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.
Symbol Set and Typeface Codes C-9
Value Typeface Family
1
260 Cyrillic Helvetica
260 Greek Helvetica
260 East Asian Helvetica
261 Cyrillic Times
261 Greek Times
261 East Asian Times
262 ITC Quorum
263 Engravers’ Old English
264 Kennerley
265 Adobe Caslon
266 Albertus
267 New Aurora Grotesque
268 TBG Omnia
269 Glypha
270 Tempo
270 Umbra (open shadow)
271 American Text
272 Pasquale
273 ITC Elan
274 Monotype Goudy Sans
275 Lutheresche Fraktur
275 Universal News & Commercial Pi
276 Thunderbird (extra condensed)
276 ITC Honda (black)
277 Shelley
277 Mr. Big
278 Macbeth
278 Universal Greek & Math Pi
279 ITC Century
280 Vineta
281 TBG Duc de Berry
282 Times Europa
283 ITC Jamille
284 Flyer
285 Wedding Text
286 Carolina
Value Typeface Family
1
287 Avenir
288 Lucia
289 Tekton
290 Charme
291 ITC Flora
292 Basilica
293 Auriol
294 Kuenstler Script
295 ITC New Baskerville
296 Berling
297 News Gothic
298 Critter
298 Linotype Holiday Pi 1, 2, & 3
299 Medici Script
300 Aurora
301 Carta
302 Adobe Symbol
303 Insignia
304 Perpetua
305 Raleigh
306 Romic
307 Formata
308 Cyrillic Univers
308 Chuan Pim (like Univers)
308 Narkis Tam (like Univers)
308 Greek Univers II
309 Bauer Bodoni
310 Industria
311 Cutout
311 Decoration Pi
312 Letraset Bramley
313 Isabella
314 Cascade Script
315 VAG Rounded
316 Russell Square
317 Liberty
Table C-3. Typeface Base Values (continued)
1
These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the
owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts
does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.
C-10 Symbol Set and Typeface Codes
Value Typeface Family
1
318 ITC Esprit
319 Clairvaux
320 Raphael
321 ITC Franklin Gothic
322 Murray Hill
323 Baker Signet
324 Mythos
324 Gambling Pi
325 San Marco
326 Typo Roman
327 Engravers Text (inline)
327 New Berolina (italic)
328 Orbit-B
329 McCollough
330 ITC Isadora
331 Giddyup
331 Audio Pi
332 Letraset Crillee
333 Agfa Nadianne
334 Compliment
335 ITC Giovanni
336 Neuzeit S
337 Erbar
338 Parisian
339 Nofret
340 City
341 Old Style 7
342 Bell Centennial
343 Lydian
344 Monotype Ellington
345 Impressum
346 Reporter No. 2
347 Freestyle Script
348 Serpentine
349 Lithos
350 Basilia
Value Typeface Family
1
351 Simplified Arabic
352 Maximus
353 ITC Slimbach
357 Berthold Garamond
358 Rad
358 Land Pi
359 Oxford (italic)
359 Kino (bold condensed)
360 Looney Tunes
360 E13B MICR
361 Imperial
361 CMC-7 MICR
362 Charlemagne
363 Present Script
364 Repro Script (italic)
364 Matura (bold)
365 Baskerville No. 2
366 Engravers’ Roman
367 VGC Egyptian 505
368 TBG Herculanum
369 Clearface Gothic
370 Studz
370 Border Pi 1515-9
371 Toolbox
371 Bundesbahn Pi
372 Quake
372 Chemical Pi
373 Neuland (solid & inline)
373 Newton Inline
373 Warning Pi
374 Harry
375 Alternate Gothic (numbered)
376 Figaro
377 Formal Script
378 Holland Title
379 ITC Barcelona
Table C-3. Typeface Base Values (continued)
1
These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the
owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts
does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.
Symbol Set and Typeface Codes C-11
Value Typeface Family
1
380 Cartier
381 Deepdene
382 Delphin
383 Parsons
384 Brighton
385 Berthold Barmeno
386 Berthold Colossalis
387 Berthold Cosmos
388 ITC Isbell
389 ITC Mixage
390 Sonata
390 Badr, or Bayaan II
391 ITC Newtext
392 Happening
393 Menue
394 Doric
395 S’maragd
396 Pierrot
396 Ornaments
397 Berthold Bodoni Old Face
398 Schadow
399 Akzidens Grotesk Buch
400 Akzidens Grotesk Buch Stencil
401 Akzidens Grotesk Buch Schulbuch
402 Bookman
403 Bruce Old Style
404 Bulmer
405 Madison
406 Textype
407 Primer
408 Garamond (Simoncini)
409 Adobe Wood Series 2
410 Rotis Serif
410 Caravan LH One
411 Rotis Semiserif
411 Caravan LH Two
Value Typeface Family
1
412 Rotis Sans Serif
412 Caravan LH Three
413 Rotis Semisans
413 Caravan LH Four
414 Arcadia
415 ITC Veljovik
416 Armenian Aramian
417 Armenian Barz
418 Helvetica Rounded
419 Olympian
420 DIN Engschrift (condensed)
420 DIN Mittelschrift
421 Granjon
422 Guardi
423 Impact
424 Sassoon Primary
425 Packard
426 Baskerville Book
427 ITC Pacella
428 Rusticana
429 Eccentric
430 Embassy Script
430 Greek Florentine Script II
431 PL Latin Bold
431 PL Latin Elongated (condensed)
431 Latin Antique
431 Latin Wide (extended)
432 ITC Modern 216
433 Serlio
434 Piranesi
435 Imago
436 Wilke
437 Cyrillic 22
438 Adobe Garamond
439 Seagull
440 Latin MT
Table C-3. Typeface Base Values (continued)
1
These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the
owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts
does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.
C-12 Symbol Set and Typeface Codes
Value Typeface Family
1
441 Runic MT
442 Moore Computer
443 Commercial Script
444 Dominante
445 Wilhelm Klingspor Gotisch
446 Trajanus
447 TSI Caxton
447 Letraset Caxton
448 Fette Fraktur
448 Sapphire (pattern 0)
448 Saphir (pattern 0)
449 Rainbow Bass (pattern 0)
449 European Pi
450 Banco
451 Bodoni Antiqua
452 Sallwey Script
452 Mathematical Pi
453 Congress
454 Cheq
455 Berthold Walbaum Buch (B.metrics)
456 Huxley Vertical
457 Grayda
458 Penfield No. 3
459 Michelangelo
460 Neo Didot
461 Berthold Caslon Buch
462 Sans No. 1
463 Torino
464 Photina
465 Calligraphiques
466 Concorde Nova
467 Franco
468 Goudy Text
469 Balloon (italic)
470 Eusebius
470 Eusebius Open (inline)
Value Typeface Family
1
471 Digital
471 Noris Script (italic)
472 Poppl-Pontifex (B.metrics)
473 Amigo
473 Pelican (italic)
473 Visigoth (bold italic)
474 Letraset Arta
475 Post Mediaval
476 Adsans
477 Ariadne
478 Calligraphy
479 Didot
480 Ashley Script (italic)
480 Ashley Crawford (bold)
480 Ashley Inline (inline)
481 Catull
482 Cremona
483 Audrey No. 2
484 Lo-Type
485 Madame (patterned with shadow)
486 Roundy
486 Animals
487 Ruling Script
487 Business & Services 1
488 Sho
488 Business & Services 2
489 Wiesbaden Swing
489 Commercial 1
490 Star Trek Next
490 Commercial 2
491 ITC Highlander
491 Ecology
492 Helios II
492 General Symbols 1
493 Kai Medium
493 General Symbols 2
Table C-3. Typeface Base Values (continued)
1
These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the
owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts
does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.
Symbol Set and Typeface Codes C-13
Value Typeface Family
1
494 Medical & Pharmaceutical 1
495 Space
495 Musical
496 Special Alphabets 4
497 Special Alphabets 5
498 Special Alphabets 6
499 Inflex
500 Monotype Old Style
501 Ming
502 FangSong
503 Helinda Rook
504 Original Script
505 Citadel Script
506 Old Fashion Script
507 ITC Legacy Serif
508 ITC Legacy Sans
509 Athenaeum
509 Athenaeum Negative (pattern 0)
509 Athenaeum Positive (pattern 1)
510 ITC Anna (condensed)
510 ITC Beesknees (black)
511 ITC Studio Script (italic)
511 ITC Mona Lisa Recut (inline)
511 ITC Mona Lisa Solid (upright)
512 Sackers Square Gothic
512 Sackers English Script
513 Heritage
514 Sackers Gothic
516 Greek Helios II
517 Times (Ten, New, etc.)
518 Berthold Script
519 Bernhard Tango (italic)
520 Castellar (inline)
521 Else
522 Basque (condensed)
522 Palace Script (italic)
Value Typeface Family
1
523 Centaur
524 Fine Hand
525 Linotype Astrology Pi
526 Sackers Roman
527 Kompakt (ultra black italic)
527 Monoline Script (italic)
528 Othello (bold condensed)
529 Sackers Classic Roman
529 Sackers Italian Script (italic)
530 Musketeer
530 Riviera (inline)
531 Poppl-Residenz
532 Rotation
533 Bank Gothic
534 Delphian (inline)
534 Greeting Monotone
535 Sackers Antique Roman
536 Schwabacher
537 Egyptienne (condensed)
538 Artisan Roman (inline)
538 Forte (bold italic)
539 Burin Roman
539 Burin Sans (light)
540 Hellenic Wide (extended)
541 Thompson Quillscript
542 Kartoon
543 Classic Roman
544 AG Old Face
545 Lucian
546 Della Robbia
547 Libra
548 Brody (bold upright)
549 Ad Lib (bold)
550 Choc (black)
551 Handle Oldstyle
552 Roman
Table C-3. Typeface Base Values (continued)
1
These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the
owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts
does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.
C-14 Symbol Set and Typeface Codes
Value Typeface Family
1
553 Antique Roman
554 Goudy Catalogue, addt’l Old Style faces
554 Goudy Handtooled (inline)
554 Goudy Heavyface (black)
555 Calligrapher
556 Lucida Bright
557 Pi Collection
558 Broadpen
559 Amazone
560 Frank Ruehl
561 Cloe
562 Discus
563 Myriad
565 WTC Our Bodoni
566 Ideal Schreibschrift
567 Print
568 Lucida Blackletter
569 Lucida Calligraphy
570 Data 70
571 Compacta (expanded)
571 Helvetica Inserat (condensed)
572 Lucida Handwriting
572 Milestones
573 Biffo
574 Calvert
575 Cantoria
576 Dorchester Script
577 Grotesque
578 Pepita
579 Vectora
580 Script Bold
581 Spectrum
582 Boulevard
583 Cheltenham
584 De Vinne
585 London Text (inline)
Value Typeface Family
1
585 Profil (bold italic inline)
586 Imprint
587 Allegro (bold italic)
587 Engraver’s Gothic (text)
588 Bernhard (bold condensed)
588 Eckmann (text)
589 Cloister Open Face (outline)
589 Davida (text)
589 Klang (italic)
590 Fry’s Baskerville
591 Metro
592 Mandate
593 Star Trek Gen
594 Virile
595 Bingham Script (text)
595 Block (bold)
596 ITC Gorilla (text)
596 ITC Pioneer (outline shadow)
597 Ruzicka
598 Bodoni Campanile
599 Linotype Modern
600 Monterey Script (italic)
600 Playbill (condensed)
601 Normande
602 Wave
603 Bernhard Fashion (extra light)
603 Mercurius
604 Stuyvesant (inline)
605 Impuls (italic)
605 Romana (text & bold)
606 Shotgun
607 Ehrhardt
608 ITC Grizzly
609 ITC Grouch
610 ITC Tom’s New Roman
611 Palette (italic)
Table C-3. Typeface Base Values (continued)
1
These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the
owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts
does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.
Symbol Set and Typeface Codes C-15
Value Typeface Family
1
611 Hanseatic (ultrabold condensed)
612 Bison
613 Jefferson
614 Electra
615 Antique No. 3
616 Flemish Script (italic)
617 Hallmark Bodoni
618 Modern #20
619 Westinghouse Gothic
620 Bloc (outline)
620 Empire (ultra condensed)
621 Oscar
622 Eagle Bold
622 Joanna Solotype (inline)
623 Akzidenz-Grotesk (B.metrics)
624 Koch Antiqua
625 Mirarae
626 Horley Old Style
627 Tango
628 Pifont Circle Numbers
629 Pifont OCRA Numbers
630 Pifont Square Numbers
631 Pifont Triangle Numbers
632 Bank Script (italic)
633 Serlio Dekoration (pi numbers)
634 Concorde (B.metrics)
635 Jets
636 Jetsons
637 Looney Type
638 Pompeijana
639 Rusticana (Frutiger)
640 Notre Dame
641 Beverly Hills (inline)
641 Lotus (pattern 0)
642 Advertisers Gothic Light
642 Eclipse (pattern 0)
Value Typeface Family
1
643 Capone Light
643 Victorian Silhouette (contour)
644 Dynamo (extra bold)
644 Modernistic (inline)
645 Gallia (inline)
645 Skjald
646 Bell Gothic
647 Gillies Gothic Bold (italic)
648 Quaint Roman
648 Chic (inline)
649 PL Westerveldt Light (condensed)
650 PL Davison Americana
651 TC Jasper
652 Poppl-Laudatio
653 TC Europa Bold
654 Siena Black (italic)
655 Yearbook
656 Koloss (extra bold)
657 Phenix American (extra condensed)
658 PL Bernhardt
659 Orlando Caps
659 PL Barclay Outline (outline)
660 PL Britannia Bold
661 PL Fiorello Condensed
662 Fluidum Bold (italic)
663 Woodblock (bold)
663 Sinaloa (pattern 0)
664 Stratford Extra Bold
664 Matra (pattern 0)
665 PL Tower Condensed
666 Section Bold Condensed
667 Miehle Condensed
668 Phyllis
669 Modernique (extra bold)
670 Egyptienne F
671 Post Antiqua (B.metrics)
Table C-3. Typeface Base Values (continued)
1
These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the
owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts
does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.
C-16 Symbol Set and Typeface Codes
Value Typeface Family
1
672 Diotima
673 Aldus
674 Chaplin (italic)
675 Uncle Sam Stars (pattern 0, shadow)
675 Uncle Sam Stripes (pattern 1, shadow)
676 Wildstyle
677 Logan (pattern 0)
677 Eon Age (pattern 1)
677 System X3 (pattern 2)
677 Galaxy Run (pattern 3)
678 Jukebox (bold condensed)
679 Marking Numbers Squares
679 Al Harf Al Jadid
680 Vivaldi
681 Codex
682 Metronome Gothic (bold extra condensed)
683 Salut (bold)
684 Lucida Fax
685 Bellevue
686 Architect
687 Beton Extra Bold
688 Metropolis (extra bold, solid & inline)
689 PL Davison Zip Bold
690 Neon (Nebiolo)
691 PL Benguiat Frisky
692 PL Bartuska Trophy Oblique
693 Cable
694 PL Brazilia
695 PL Radiant
696 Ritmo Bold (italic)
697 PL Fiedler Gothic Bold
698 Egiziano Black
699 Studio
700 PL Futura Maxi
701 Solemnis
Value Typeface Family
1
702 Quirinus Bold (condensed)
703 PL West Behemoth Semi Condensed (XBd Cd)
704 Renault
705 Forbes Bold
706 Mobil
707 Becket
708 Lucida Sans Typewriter
709 Cartoon Script Roman
710 Campanula
711 Odilia
712 Lino Letter
713 Henche
714 Mahlau (condensed)
715 Aquarias No. 8 (bold)
716 CG Frontiera
717 Globe Gothic
718 Signature
719 Sans Serif Stencil
720 Boldface PS
721 Title PS
725 Hess Neobold
726 Hollandse Mediaeval
727 Holland Seminar
728 CG Cloister
729 Adroit
730 Claire News
731 Triplett
732 Accolade
733 Claridge
734 Alpin Gothic
735 Geometric
736 Heldustry
737 Busorama
738 Salto
739 Fehrle Display
Table C-3. Typeface Base Values (continued)
1
These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the
owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts
does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.
Symbol Set and Typeface Codes C-17
Value Typeface Family
1
740 Kismet
741 Digi Fraktur
742 Anglia
743 Jiffy
744 Rosewood
745 Zebrawood
746 Pepperwood (condensed)
747 Copal (solid)
747 Copal (outline, patterned)
748 Motter Corpus (extrabold)
749 Cerigo
750 Caflisch Script
751 Mezz
752 Nueva
753 Penumbra
754 Sanvito
755 Viva
756 Alexa (italic)
756 Balzano
756 Caliban (condensed italic)
757 Ex Ponto
758 Neue Hammer Unziale 1
758 Neue Hammer Unziale 2 (edge)
759 Galahad
760 LiShu (China)
760 Gungse (Korean)
760 HanYang GungSe Proportional (Korean)
761 Yuang (Yuan, XiYuang - China)
762 Miryam
763 Ryadh
764 Arkona (ital script)
765 El Greco (ital script)
766 Aja (ital script)
767 Poppl-Exquisit (ital script)
768 Sassafras Roman
Value Typeface Family
1
769 Kigali Roman
770 Rundfunk Antiqua
771 Rundfunk Grotesk
772 Apolline
773 Alisal
774 Strider
775 Throhand
776 Cicero (e should be e-acute)
777 Antique Condensed Two
778 Asphalt Black
779 Avalon
780 Brok
781 Citadel
782 Hermes
783 Lafayette
784 Narcissus
785 Pilsner
786 Showcard Moderne
787 Streamline
788 Scherzo
789 Jante Antiqua
790 Albers Architype
791 Aubette Architype
792 Ballmer Architype
793 Bayer Type Architype
794 Schwitters Architype
795 Crane
796 Runa Serif
797 Comedia Serif
798 Breadline Normal
799 Revolution Normal
800 Virgin Roman Normal
801 Gararond
802 Abacus
803 Classic
1
These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the
owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts
does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.
Table C-3. Typeface Base Values (continued)
C-18 Symbol Set and Typeface Codes
Value Typeface Family
1
804 Cupid
805 Arepo
806 Aureus Uncial (upright)
807 Connach (upright, norm and uncial lc)
808 Cresci Rotunda (upright)
809 Donatello (italic, black italic)
810 Francesca (lombardic, upright & cond)
810 Lombardic Capitals (upright)
811 Ludovico Smooth (italic & flourishes)
811 Ludovico Woodcut (italic & flourishes)
812 Mantegna (italic)
813 Palatino Rotunda (upright)
814 Percival (upright)
815 Wolfdance (italic)
816 Adastra (bold italic inline)
817 Ampersands
818 Arwen (upright)
819 Blocks (upright, solid filled)
820 Elegant (inline & outline)
821 Poetry (solid & inline)
822 Sphinx (extrabold, solid & inline)
823 Tube (upright)
824 Searsucker (solid, outline, patterned)
825 Hindenburg (upright)
826 Informal (black, norm & condensed)
827 Marquis (upright)
828 Questions
829 Maximilian (upright, inline)
830 Minimal (upright thin)
831 Stalk (upright inline)
832 Mariposa (family)
833 Mariposa Sans (family)
834 Corvallis (upright & italic)
835 Corvallis Sans (upright & italic)
Value Typeface Family
1
836 Alligators
837 Carmela (italic)
838 Dorothea (upright)
839 Hrabanus (upright)
840 Lexie’s Animals
841 Mexican Birds
841 Mexican Borders
841 Mexican Symbols
842 Monmouth (upright)
843 Neuhengen (upright)
844 Ophelia Italic
845 Poggio Bookhand (upright)
846 Pompeii Capitals (upright)
847 Ramsey (upright)
848 Sallando Italic
849 Thalia Italic
850 Trieste (upright)
851 Connach Historic
852 Lombardic Caps
853 Ludovico Smooth Flourish
853 Ludovico Woodcut Flourish
854 Newton Inline
855 Lucida Typewriter
930 Akzidenz Grotesk Buch Rounded
1030 Isil Gothic
2128 HanYang Batang Fixed Pitch (Korean)
2128 MS Mincho (Japan, Proportional)
2200 HanYang Gulrim Fixed Pitch (Korean)
2201 HanYang Dotum Fixed Pitch (Korean)
2201 MS Gothic (Japan, Proportional)
2549 Ming Light (Japan, Proportional)
2730 Wingdings
2808 HanYang GungSe Fixed Pitch (Korean)
1
These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the
owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts
does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.
Table C-3. Typeface Base Values (continued)
Symbol Set and Typeface Codes C-19
C-20 Symbol Set and Typeface Codes
Index
!
?&b#W 2-7
?*l # R 2-25
?*l#O - Logical Operation 2-17
A
adaptive compression
IIIP 2-4
adaptive data compression (ADC) 2-4, 5-1
banded images 5-5
image separation 5-5
transmission guidelines 5-4
alphanumeric ID command 2-79
AppleTalk
configuration 2-7, 2-71
device type 2-9
PCL job support 2-7
RENAME 2-8, 2-71
type, PostScript 2-8
ZONE 2-71
arbitrary dither matrix sizes 2-86
assign color index command 2-70
B
base values, typeface 3-12
bitmap fonts, internal 3-2
C
character
conversion table B-22
downloading 5-6
enhancement segment 2-36, 2-47
enhancements 2-52
text path direction 2-34
CID command 2-70
colorcommands 2-85
components 1, 2, and 3 2-70
foreground 2-70
lookup tables 2-70
Color LaserJet printer 2-70
command
alphanumeric ID 2-79
assign color index 2-70
change text path direction 2-34
configuration 2-7
end raster graphics 2-2
enter HP-GL/2 mode 2-85
fill type HP-GL/2 5-6
foreground color 2-70
HP-GL/2 mode 2-87
job separation 2-2
line type HP-GL/2 5-6
logical operation 2-17
MC (merge control) 2-29
mechanical print quality 2-85, 2-89
media destination (output bin) 2-78
media source 2-76
media type 2-85, 2-88
negative motion 2-90
number of copies 2-2
output bin selection 2-2, 2-78
page size 2-2
palette control 2-70
paper (media) source 2-76
pixel placement 2-25, 2-28
PP (pixel placement) 2-28
print quality 2-89
push/pop palette 2-71
render algorithm 2-71, 2-104
simple color 2-71
text parsing method 2-33
text path direction 2-34
compression
adaptive compression 2-4
transmission recommendations 5-4
compression methods, memory saving 5-6
configuration command 2-7
Configure Image Data (CID) command 2-70
conventions, manual i-iv
corrections 1-5
D
data transmission 5-4
decimal values
character B-22
printer commands A-1
default settings
factory 4-1
HP-GL/2 4-4
DeskJet 1200C printer 2-85
DeskJet 1600C printer 2-91
device type, AppleTalk 2-9
dither patterns 2-104
download dither matrix 2-70
downloading characters 5-6
duplex printing 2-1
Index-1
E
EconoMode 2-61
economy mode, 4L 2-11
end raster graphics command 2-2
enter HP-GL/2 mode command 2-85
environment
factory default 4-1
saving 2-10
user default 4-7
F
factory default
environment 4-1
HP-GL/2 setting 4-4
settings 4-1
feature settings
default 4-1
user 4-7
fill type HP-GL/2 command 5-6
font format 16 2-32
font header format 16 2-35
font metric calculation 2-50
font selection
line printer substitution 3-2
symbol set ID values C-2
fontsinternal scalable 3-3
new header segments 2-36
TrueType 3-10
foreground color 2-70
frame anchor/MEt architecture 2-86
furigana (ruby characters) 2-54
G
galley character segment 2-36, 2-38
gamma correction 2-70
grid centered, pixel 2-25
grid intersection, pixel 2-25
H
hexadecimal values
character B-22
printer commands A-1
HP-GL/2
kind 1 values C-2
pixel placement command 2-28
polygon memory usage 5-6
HP-GL/2 mode command 2-87
I
I/O configuration 2-7
ID values, symbol set C-2
image adapt 5-2
initialization 2-49
internal fonts 3-1
internal symbol sets 3-1
mapping B-1
See also symbol set charts
internal typefaces 3-1
ISO substitution characters B-21
J
job separation command
(4Si) 2-10
(IIISi) 2-2
L
large fonts 2-35
LaserJet
4 Plus printer 2-60
4 printer 2-4
4000 series printers 2-106
4L printer 2-11
4LC printer 2-72
4LJ printer 2-72
4M Plus printer 2-60
4M printer 2-4
4ML printer 2-12
4MP printer 2-32
4P printer 2-31 - 2-32
4PJ printer 2-32
4Si printer 2-10
4V/4MV printer 2-62
5L printer 2-74
5MP printer 2-73
5P printer 2-73
5Si Mopier 2-105
5Si/5SiMx printers 2-75
6L printers 2-106
6P/6MP printers 2-105
Color printer 2-70
III printer 2-1
IIID printer 2-1
IIIP printer 2-2
IIISi printer 2-2
line printer font selection 3-2
line type HP-GL/2 command 5-6
logical operations 2-13
and transparency interactions 2-15
command 2-17
logical page area 1-26
Index-2
M
manual conventions i-iv
MC (merge control) command 2-29
mechanical print quality command 2-85
media destination (output bin) 2-78
media source command 2-76
media type command 2-85, 2-88
media type, selection by 2-79
memory
character storage requirements 5-6
compression methods 5-6
polygon usage 5-6
print model 5-5
memory enhancement technology (MEt) 2-11, 2-60,
5-1 features 5-3
page protection 5-3
memory usage 5-1
font bitmaps 5-4
merge control command 2-29
monochrome print mode 2-70
MS Gothic 2-32
MS Mincho 2-32
N
name binding protocol (NBP) 2-8
negative motion 2-85
negative motion command 2-90
network, AppleTalk configuration 2-7
noise dither 2-86
notes i-iv
number of copies 2-2
O
octal character values B-22
one-byte typeface values 3-12
operations, logical 2-13
output bin command 2-78
output bin selection command 2-2
P
page protection 5-4
MEt 5-3
page size command 2-2
palette control command 2-70
paper (media) source command 2-76
patterns
HP-GL/2 selection 5-6
memory usage 5-6
wide 5-6
PCL default settings 4-1
feature support 1-1, 2-1
job over AppleTalk 2-7
printer commands A-1
pixel placement 2-25
command 2-25
HP-GL/2 command 2-28
PCL command 2-25
polygons, avoid multiple smaller 5-6
PostScript
level 1 operators 2-8
level 2 operators 2-8
NBP 2-8
powersave mode 2-61
PP command, HP-GL/2 2-28
print environment default settings 4-4
print job initialization 2-49
print model 2-13
memory efficiency 5-5
print quality command 2-89
See mechanical print quality command
printable area tables 1-26
printer commands
PCL - decimal and hexadecimal values A-1
printer introduction dates 1-2
printer name, AppleTalk 2-8, 2-71
printing ruby characters (furigana) 2-54
push/pop palette command 2-71
Q
quality, print 2-89
R
raster graphics
adaptive compression (IIIP) 2-4
compression methods 5-6
transmission guidelines 5-4
raster scaling 2-71, 2-85
render algorithm command 2-71, 2-104
resource saving
4 Plus/4M Plus 2-60
4Si 2-10
ROP3 logical operation 2-17
ruby characters (furigana) 2-54
S
scalable typefaces, internal 3-3
selection by media type 2-79
sending raster data to printer 5-4
set viewing illuminant command 2-71
setdevparams, PostScript 2-8
setprintername, PostScript 2-8
settings, HP-GL/2 default 4-4
Index-3
simple color command 2-71
string ID 2-79
symbol set
charts B-1
ID selection values C-2
ISO substitution characters B-21
kind 1 values C-2
scalable fonts 3-3
T
text parsing method command 2-33
text path direction, character 2-34
transfer raster graphics by plane 2-71
transmission
ADC recommendations 5-4
compression recommendations 5-4
transparency interactions and logical operation 2-15
TrueType fonts 3-10
two-byte fonts 2-86
two-byte typeface values 3-12
type, AppleTalk 2-9
typeface
base values 3-12, C-5
family values C-5
one-byte values 3-12
two-byte values 3-12
value field 3-12
vendor values C-5
typeface field, scalable font descriptor 3-12
typeface string segment 2-36, 2-42
typefaces, internal scalable 3-3
U
user environment settings 4-7
V
vertical
clusters 2-58
printing 2-34
rotated characters 2-34
rotation segment 2-36, 2-45
substitution character segment 2-36
substitution characters 2-35
substitution segment 2-41
underlining 2-56
writing 2-53
Index-4
